R12 x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals ...dbmanagement.info/Books/MIX/D59687GC10_ag2_General_Ledger_GL.… · R12.x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals - Student

R12.x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals - Student Practices

Student Activity Guide

D59687GC10

Edition 1.0

January 2010

D63161

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. Disclaimer This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. You may copy and print this document solely for your own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be modified or altered in any way. Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright law, you may not use, share, download, upload, copy, print, display, perform, reproduce, publish, license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in whole or in part without the express authorization of Oracle. The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the document, please report them in writing to: Oracle University, 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This document is not warranted to be error-free. Restricted Rights Notice If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using the documentation on behalf of the United States Government, the following notice is applicable: U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS The U.S. Government’s rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display, or disclose these training materials are restricted by the terms of the applicable Oracle license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract. Trademark Notice Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.

Author

Stacey Tucker-Blosch

Contributing Author

Brent Bosin, Marilyn Crawford, Shivranjini Krishnamurthy

Technical Contributors and Reviewers

Ivy Farren, Joe Gum, Rohit Kathuria, Theresa Hickman, Bruce Ingram, Suzanne Miller, Vidya

Nagaraj, Cynthia Prier, Pam Rietz, Christine Rudd, Prescilla Sadepalli, Reema.Saravanan,

Deepak Seth, Mei Siauw, Lata Sundar, Kathy Wohnoutka, Theresa Wong, Michael Wurtzel

This book was published using: Oracle Tutor

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED

Copyright © 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

R12.x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals Student Practices Table of Contents i

Table of Contents

R12.x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals - Student Practices .......................................1-1 R12.1 Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals Student Practices ..............................................1-3 Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................1-4 Oracle General Ledger Process .....................................................................................................................1-5

Practice - Create a New User .....................................................................................................................1-6 Solution - Create a New User ....................................................................................................................1-8

Ledger ............................................................................................................................................................1-10 Practice - Define Value Sets ......................................................................................................................1-11 Solution - Define Value Sets .....................................................................................................................1-13 Practice - Define an Accounting Key Flexfield Structure .........................................................................1-15 Solution - Define an Accounting Key Flexfield Structure .........................................................................1-18 Practice - Enter Values ..............................................................................................................................1-23 Solution – Enter Values .............................................................................................................................1-27 Practice - Define an Accounting Calendar .................................................................................................1-34 Solution - Define an Accounting Calendar ................................................................................................1-36 Practice - Verify Functional Currencies are Enabled .................................................................................1-39 Solution - Verify Functional Currencies are Enabled ................................................................................1-40 Guided Demonstration - Ledger Set Processing ........................................................................................1-41 Practice - Define a Ledger (Required) .......................................................................................................1-45 Solution – Define a Ledger (Required) ......................................................................................................1-47 Practice - Create a Responsibility for the Controller (Required) ...............................................................1-50 Solution - Create a Responsibility for the Controller (Required) ..............................................................1-52 Practice - View Account Combinations Created with Dynamic Insertion .................................................1-56 Solution - View Account Combinations Created with Dynamic Insertion ................................................1-57 Practice - Create a Security Rule ...............................................................................................................1-58 Solution – Create a Security Rule ..............................................................................................................1-59 Practice - Define Cross Validation Rules ..................................................................................................1-61 Solution - Define Cross Validation Rules (Required) ...............................................................................1-64 Practice - Define and Test Shorthand Aliases ............................................................................................1-69 Solution - Define and Test Shorthand Aliases (Required) .........................................................................1-72 Practice - Open the First Accounting Period (Required) ...........................................................................1-76 Solution - Open the First Accounting Period (Required)...........................................................................1-78 Practice - Run General Ledger Reports .....................................................................................................1-80 Solution - Run General Ledger Reports .....................................................................................................1-81 Practice - Account Hierarchy Manager ......................................................................................................1-82 Solution – Account Hierarchy Manager ....................................................................................................1-85

Using Accounting Setup Manager .................................................................................................................1-91 Practice - Define Sequencing .....................................................................................................................1-92 Solution – Define Sequencing ...................................................................................................................1-93 Guided Demonstration - View Ledger Set .................................................................................................1-98

Basic Journal Entries .....................................................................................................................................1-99 Practice - Set up Journal Sources ...............................................................................................................1-100 Solution - Set up Journal Sources ..............................................................................................................1-101 Practice - Set up a Journal Category (Required) ........................................................................................1-102 Solution – Set up a Journal Category (Required) ......................................................................................1-103 Practice - Create a Journal Batch (Required) .............................................................................................1-104 Solution - Create a Journal Batch (Required) ............................................................................................1-106 Practice - Create a Second Journal Batch (Required) ................................................................................1-109 Solution - Create a Second Journal Batch (Required) ...............................................................................1-111 Practice - Create a Single Journal (Required) ............................................................................................1-114 Solution – Create a Single Journal (Required)...........................................................................................1-115 Practice - Post Journals (Required) ............................................................................................................1-117

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED


R12.x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals Student Practices Table of Contents ii

Solution - Post Journals (Required) ...........................................................................................................1-118 Practice - Review Journal Entries and Account Balances (Required) .......................................................1-120 Solution - Review Journal Entries and Account Balances (Required) .......................................................1-123 Practice - Reverse a Journal Entry (Required) ...........................................................................................1-134 Solution - Reverse a Journal Entry (Required) ..........................................................................................1-136 Practice - Schedule a Journal to Reverse then Generate the Reversal (Required) ....................................1-141 Solution - Schedule a Journal to Reverse then Generate the Reversal (Required) ...................................1-142 Practice - Set up Automatic Journal Reversal (Required) .........................................................................1-146 Solution - Set up Automatic Journal Reversal (Required) .........................................................................1-149 Practice - Set up Suspense Accounts (Required) .......................................................................................1-154 Solution - Set up Suspense Accounts (Required) ......................................................................................1-156 Practice - Create a STAT Journal (Required) ............................................................................................1-160 Solution - Create a STAT Journal (Required) ...........................................................................................1-161 Practice - Define Statistical Units of Measure (Optional) .........................................................................1-163 Solution - Define Statistical Units of Measure (Optional) .........................................................................1-165 Practice - Load a Basic Journal Using WEB ADI (Required) ...................................................................1-170 Solution - Load a Basic Journal Using WEB ADI (Required) ..................................................................1-173

Summary Accounts ........................................................................................................................................1-178 Practice - Define Summary Accounts (Required) ......................................................................................1-179 Solution - Define Summary Accounts (Required) .....................................................................................1-182 Guided Demonstration - Maintain Summary Templates Program .............................................................1-190

Advanced Journal Entries ..............................................................................................................................1-191 Practice - Create Recurring Journals (Required) .......................................................................................1-192 Solution - Create Recurring Journals (Required) .......................................................................................1-196 Practice - Create a Mass Allocation Journal (Required) ............................................................................1-210 Solution - Create a Mass Allocation Journal (Required) ...........................................................................1-213 Practice - Journal Line Reconciliation .......................................................................................................1-218 Solution – Journal Line Reconciliation......................................................................................................1-219

Advanced Security .........................................................................................................................................1-224 Practice - Create a Ledger Set ....................................................................................................................1-225 Solution - Create a Ledger Set ...................................................................................................................1-227 Practice - Create a Data Access Set ...........................................................................................................1-230 Guided Demonstration- Create a Data Access Set .....................................................................................1-232 Guided Demonstration - Define Definition Access Sets and Secure Definitions ......................................1-236

Financial Budgeting .......................................................................................................................................1-239 Multi-Currency ..............................................................................................................................................1-240

Practice - Define Currencies (Required) ....................................................................................................1-241 Solution - Define Currencies (Required) ...................................................................................................1-242 Practice - Define Rate Types (Required) ...................................................................................................1-243 Solution - Define Rate Types (Required) ..................................................................................................1-244 Practice - Define Daily Conversion Rates Using the Currency Rates Manager (Required) ......................1-246 Solution - Define Daily Conversion Rates Using the Currency Rates Manager (Required) .....................1-247 Practice - Enter a Foreign Currency Journal (Required) ............................................................................1-249 Solution - Enter a Foreign Currency Journal (Required) ...........................................................................1-251 Practice - Enter a Journal with Conversion Rounding Differences (Required) .........................................1-254 Solution - Enter a Journal with Conversion Rounding Differences (Required) .........................................1-255 Practice - Revalue Foreign Currency Balances Using Period End Rates (Required) ................................1-258

Consolidations ...............................................................................................................................................1-262 Practice - Set Up and Perform Consolidation ............................................................................................1-263 Solution - Set Up and Perform Consolidation ...........................................................................................1-266

Period Close ...................................................................................................................................................1-272 Guided Demonstration - Close Period .......................................................................................................1-273

Financial Reporting .......................................................................................................................................1-275 Practice - Define a Row Set (Required) .....................................................................................................1-276 Solution - Define a Row Set (Required) ....................................................................................................1-278 Practice - Define a Column Set (Required) ...............................................................................................1-283 Solution - Define a Column Set (Required) ...............................................................................................1-285

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED


R12.x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals Student Practices Table of Contents iii

Practice - Define a Report (Required) .......................................................................................................1-289 Solution - Define a Report (Required) .......................................................................................................1-291 Practice - Define a Content Set (Required) ................................................................................................1-293 Solution - Define a Content Set (Required) ...............................................................................................1-294 Practice - Define a Row Order (Required) ................................................................................................1-297 Solution - Define a Row Order (Required) ................................................................................................1-300 Guided Demonstration - FSG Reporting Using Ledger Sets .....................................................................1-305

Oracle Advanced Global Intercompany System ............................................................................................1-307 Guided Demonstration - Setting up Advanced Global Intercompany System ...........................................1-308 Practice - Intercompany and Intracompany Balancing ..............................................................................1-315 Solution – Intercompany and Intracompany Balancing .............................................................................1-317 Practice - Create Manual Intercompany Transaction .................................................................................1-321 Solution – Create Manual Intercompany Transaction ...............................................................................1-326

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED


R12.x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals Student Practices Table of Contents v

Preface

Profile

Prerequisites

• Navigating Oracle Applications

How This Course Is Organized

Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals is an instructor-led course featuring lecture and hands-on exercises. Online demonstrations and written practice sessions reinforce the concepts and skills introduced.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED


R12.x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals Student Practices Table of Contents vi

Related Publications

• System release bulletins

• Installation and user’s guides

• Read-me files

• International Oracle User’s Group (IOUG) articles

• Oracle Magazine

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED


R12.x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals Student Practices Table of Contents vii

Oracle Magazine Typographic Conventions

Typographic Conventions in Text Convention Element Example

Bold italic Glossary term (if there is a glossary)

The algorithm inserts the new key.

Caps and lowercase

Buttons, check boxes, triggers, windows

Click the Executable button. Select the Can’t Delete Card check box. Assign a When-Validate-Item trigger to the ORD block. Open the Master Schedule window.

Courier new, case sensitive (default is lowercase)

Code output, directory names, filenames, passwords, pathnames, URLs, user input, usernames

Code output: debug.set (‘I”, 300); Directory: bin (DOS), $FMHOME (UNIX) Filename: Locate the init.ora file. Password: User tiger as your password. Pathname: Open c:\my_docs\projects URL: Go to http://www.oracle.com User input: Enter 300 Username: Log on as scott

Initial cap Graphics labels (unless the term is a proper noun)

Customer address (but Oracle Payables)

Italic Emphasized words and phrases, titles of books and courses, variables

Do not save changes to the database. For further information, see Oracle7 Server SQL Language Reference Manual. Enter [email protected], where user_id is the name of the user.

Quotation marks

Interface elements with long names that have only initial caps; lesson and chapter titles in cross-references

Select “Include a reusable module component” and click Finish. This subject is covered in Unit II, Lesson 3, “Working with Objects.”

Uppercase SQL column names, commands, functions, schemas, table names

Use the SELECT command to view information stored in the LAST_NAME column of the EMP table.

Arrow Menu paths Select File > Save. Brackets Key names Press [Enter]. Commas Key sequences Press and release keys one at a time:

[Alternate], [F], [D] Plus signs Key combinations Press and hold these keys simultaneously: [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Del] O

racl

e U

nive

rsity

and

New

Hor

izon

s C

ompu

ter L

earn

ing

Cen

ters

- Ab

u D

habi

use

onl

y

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED


R12.x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals Student Practices Table of Contents viii

Typographic Conventions in Code Convention Element Example Caps and lowercase

Oracle Forms triggers

When-Validate-Item

Lowercase Column names, table names

SELECT last_name FROM s_emp;

Passwords DROP USER scott IDENTIFIED BY tiger;

PL/SQL objects OG_ACTIVATE_LAYER (OG_GET_LAYER (‘prod_pie_layer’))

Lowercase italic

Syntax variables CREATE ROLE role

Uppercase SQL commands and functions

SELECT userid FROM emp;

Typographic Conventions in Oracle Application Navigation Paths

This course uses simplified navigation paths, such as the following example, to direct you through Oracle Applications.

(N) Invoice > Entry > Invoice Batches Summary (M) Query > Find (B) Approve

This simplified path translates to the following:

1. (N) From the Navigator window, select Invoice then Entry then Invoice Batches Summary.

2. (M) From the menu, select Query then Find.

3. (B) Click the Approve button.

Notations:

(N) = Navigator

(M) = Menu

(T) = Tab

(B) = Button

(I) = Icon

(H) = Hyperlink

(ST) = Sub Tab

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED


R12.x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals Student Practices Table of Contents ix

Typographical Conventions in Oracle Application Help System Paths

This course uses a “navigation path” convention to represent actions you perform to find pertinent information in the Oracle Applications Help System.

The following help navigation path, for example—

(Help) General Ledger > Journals > Enter Journals

—represents the following sequence of actions:

1. In the navigation frame of the help system window, expand the General Ledger entry.

2. Under the General Ledger entry, expand Journals.

3. Under Journals, select Enter Journals.

4. Review the Enter Journals topic that appears in the document frame of the help system window.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED


R12.x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals Student Practices Table of Contents x

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED


R12.x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals Chapter 1 - Page 1

R12.x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals - Student Practices

Chapter 1

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



R12.x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals Student Practices

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Objectives

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Oracle General Ledger Process

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Create a New User

Overview

In this practice, you will define a new user with access to all necessary responsibilities.

Assumptions

• Replace XX with your terminal number or unique number.

• You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.

Tasks

Sign on to the System

1. Sign on to the system − User Name = operations − Password = welcome − Responsibility = System Administrator

Add a New User

2. Add a New User

• (N) Security: User > Define − User Name = XX_USER, where XX is your terminal ID. − Password = welcome (tab, re-enter to verify) − Person = Stock, Ms. Pat (choose from the list of values) − (B) OK to ignore the message

Assign Responsibilities to your User

3. Add responsibilities to your user according to the following table:

Responsibility Security Group

General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA) Standard

System Administrator Standard

General Ledger, SSC Worldwide Standard

General Ledger, SSC US Standard

Intercompany Super User, SSC Worldwide Standard

Oracle Web ADI Standard

Report Manager SuperUser Standard

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



4. Save your work.

5. Exit Oracle Applications

Login as the New User

6. Log on using the user you created − Login = XX_USER − Password = welcome

7. (B) Login

System will prompt you to create a new Password: − Old Password = welcome − New Password = XX_USER (Tab, re-enter to verify)

8. (B) Submit

9. (L) General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Create a New User

1. Sign on to the system − User Name = operations − Password = welcome − Responsibility = System Administrator

2. Add a New User

• (N) Security > User > Define − User Name = XX_USER, where XX is your terminal ID. − Password = welcome (tab, re-enter to verify) − Person = Stock, Ms. Pat (choose from the list of values) − (B) OK to ignore the message

3. Add responsibilities to your user according to the following table:

4. Add the additional Responsibilities: − General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA) − System Administrator − General Ledger, SSC Worldwide − General Ledger, SSC US − Oracle Web ADI

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



− Report Manager Super User

5. Save your work.

6. Exit Oracle Applications

Login as the New User

7. Log on using the user you created − Login = XX_USER − Password = welcome

8. (B) Login

System will prompt you to create a new Password: − Current Password = welcome − New Password = xxuser (Tab, re-enter to verify)

9. (B) Submit

10. (L) General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Ledger

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define Value Sets

Overview

In this practice, you will create value sets.

Assumptions



Tasks

Create Value Sets

1. Responsibility = General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)

2. Navigate to the Define Value Sets window

• (N) Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Validation > Sets

3. Create the following value sets. − Be sure to save after you complete each one.

Field Name Value

Value Set Name XXCompany

Description Company

List Type List of Values

Security Type Non-Hierarchical Security

Format Char

Max. Size 2

Uppercase Only Yes

Right Justify/Zero Fill Yes

Validation Type Independent

4. Save. (M) File > Save and Proceed.

Field Name Value

Value Set Name XXDepartment

Description Department

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Field Name Value



Format Char

Max. Size 3

Uppercase Only Yes



5. Save. (M) File > Save and Proceed.

Field Name Description

Value Set Name XXAccount

Description Account



Format Char

Max. Size 4

Uppercase Only Yes



6. Save. (M) File > Save

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Define Value Sets

Tasks

Create Value Sets


2. Navigate to the Define Value Sets window

• (N) Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Validation > Sets

3. Create the following value sets. − Be sure to save after you complete each one.

4. (M) File > Save and Proceed.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



5. (M) File > Save and Proceed.

6. (M) File > Save.

7. Close Value Sets window.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define an Accounting Key Flexfield Structure

Overview

In this practice, you will create an Accounting Key flexfield structure (chart of accounts).

Assumptions



• Responsibility = General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)

Tasks

1. Query the Accounting Flexfield

2. Create a new Accounting Flexfield structure by selecting any of the existing structures and selecting (I) New.

Field Value

Code XX_Accounting_Flexfield

Title XX_Accounting_Flexfield

Description XXChart of Accounts

Enabled Checked

Segment Separator Period (.)

Cross Validate Segments Checked

Freeze Rollup Groups Unchecked

Allow Dynamic Inserts Checked

Note: If you do not select Cross Validate Segments, you will not be able to assign cross validation rules to your flexfield structure.

3. Define the individual segments, the order in which they appear, which value sets they will use, and how the values will map to the GL_CODE_COMBINATIONS table, which holds all valid combinations of valid segment values.

4. (B) Segments

5. Create the structure based on the segment information in the following table:

No Name Window Prompt Column (LOV) Value Set (LOV)

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



1 Company Company SEGMENT1 XXCompany

2 Department Department SEGMENT2 XXDepartment

3 Account Account SEGMENT3 XXAccount

4 Interco Interco SEGMENT4 XXCompany

6. Save

7. (B) Open to add additional information to the Company segment definition.

Field Value

Description Company

Required Checked

Security Enabled Checked

List of Values Prompt CO

Concatenated Description Size 12

8. (B) Flexfield Qualifiers − Balancing Segment Enabled = Checked

9. (B) Open to add additional information to the Department segment definition.

Field Value


Required Checked


List of Values Prompt Dept


10. (B) Flexfield Qualifiers − Cost Center Segment Enabled = Checked − Secondary Tracking Segment Enabled = Checked − Management Segment Enabled = Checked

11. (B) Open to add additional information to the Account segment definition.

Field Value

Description Account

Required Checked


List of Values Prompt ACCT

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




12. (B) Flexfield Qualifiers − Natural Account Segment Enabled = Checked

13. (B) Open to add additional information to the Interco segment definition.

Field Value

Description Interco

Default Type Constant

Default Value 00

Required Checked

Security Enabled Unchecked

List of Values Prompt IC


14. (B) Flexfield Qualifiers − Intercompany Segment Enabled = Checked

15. Freeze the Flexfield definition. − Freeze Flexfield Definition = Checked

16. Compile the Flexfield.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Define an Accounting Key Flexfield Structure

Query the Accounting Key Flexfield Structure

Responsibility = General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)

1. Open the Key Flexfield Segments window

• (N) Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Key > Segments

2. In the Application field, query General Ledger.

3. Ensure that the Flexfield Title is Accounting Flexfield.

Create a New Accounting Key Flexfield Structure

4. Create a new Accounting Key Flexfield structure by selecting any of the existing structures and selecting (I) New.

• Name the new structure in the Code column XX_Accounting_Flexfield

Note: If you do not select Cross Validate Segments, you will not be able to assign cross validation rules to your flexfield structure.

Define the Accounting Key Flexfield Structure

Define the individual segments, the order in which they appear, which value sets they will use, and how the values will map to the GL_CODE_COMBINATIONS table, which holds all valid combinations of valid segment values.

5. (B) Segments

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



As you define your segments, you will receive a warning message that your list of values prompt is longer than your segment size. Simply click on OK, and proceed. This will be discussed a little later.

6. In the Segments Summary window, create the structure based on the segment information in the tasks.

7. (B) Save

8. Position your cursor on line 1 (Company)

9. (B) Open to add the following additional information.

Field Value

Description Company

Required Checked


List of Values Prompt CO


10. (B) Flexfield Qualifiers − Balancing Segment Enabled = Checked

11. Save.

12. Close the Flexfield Qualifiers window. Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



13. Close the Segments window.

14. In the Segments Summary window, position your cursor on line 2 (Department).

15. (B) Open to add additional information to the segment definition.

Field Value


Required Checked


List of Values Prompt DE


16. (B) Flexfield Qualifiers − Cost Center Segment Enabled = Checked − Secondary Tracking Segment Enabled = Checked − Management Segment Enabled = Checked

17. Save.

18. Close the Flexfield Qualifiers window.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




20. In the Segments Summary window, position your cursor on line 3 (Account)


Field Value

Description Account

Required Checked


List of Values Prompt ACCT


22. (B) Flexfield Qualifiers − Natural Account Segment Enabled = Checked

23. Save.



26. In the Segments Summary window, position your cursor on line 4 (Interco)


Field Value

Description Interco

Default Type Constant

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Field Value

Default Value 00

Required Checked

Security Enabled Unchecked

List of Values Prompt IC


28. (B) Flexfield Qualifiers − Intercompany Segment Enabled = Checked

29. Save.



32. Verify all information is correct as shown above. Very Important.

33. Close the Segments Summary window

Freeze the flexfield definition

34. Freeze the Flexfield definition. − Freeze Flexfield Definition = Checked

35. (B) OK in the Caution window

36. (B) Compile

37. (B) OK in the two Note windows

38. Close windows until you are back at the Navigator.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Enter Values

Overview

In this practice, you will enter the valid values into your value sets. Note: You are not creating combinations, only the lists of individual values that will appear in the LOV of each segment. As you enter transactions or journals, the values you enter for each segment will be used to create the account combinations.

Assumptions




Tasks

Enter Values

1. Open the Values window

• (N) Setup > Financials > Flexfield > Key >Values

2. Find your XXCompany value set, enter the values and information for the segment. Note that for each value you must tab completely through the row to see both Effective Date information and Qualifier information.

Value Description Enabled Parent Allow Budgeting/Posting

00 Corporate Yes No Yes, Yes

01 Domestic Ops Yes No Yes, Yes

02 Europe SA Yes No Yes, Yes

03 Foreign Ops Yes No Yes, Yes

T Total All Companies

Yes Yes No, No

3. Save

4. Find your XXDepartment value set, enter the values and information for the segment. Note that for each value you must tab completely through the row to see both Effective Date Information and Qualifier information.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




000 Balance Sheet Yes No Yes, Yes

100 Administration Yes No Yes, Yes

150 Finance Yes No Yes, Yes

175 Advertising Yes No Yes, Yes

1XX F&A Rollup Yes Yes No, No

210 Production Yes No Yes, Yes

310 Sales & Marketing Yes No Yes, Yes

350 European Sales Yes No Yes, Yes

375 American Sales Yes No Yes, Yes


3XX Mass Allocation Rollup

Yes Yes No, No

5. Save

6. Enter the values for the XXAccount segment.

Note: For each value you must tab completely through the row to see both effective information and qualifier information. Since an account type of Expense is the default, make sure the account type is correct for each account as you tab through the fields. It would be an unpleasant surprise if the cash account was misclassified as Expense and closed to retained earnings at the end of the accounting year.

Note: We will not be using the Control Account feature or the Reconciliation Flag, leave them both set to No for all values.

Value Description Enabled ParentAllow

Budgeting /Posting

Account Type

1110 Cash Yes No Yes, Yes Asset

1210 Accounts Receivable Yes No Yes, Yes Asset

1260 Allowance for Bad Debt Yes No Yes, Yes Asset

1550 Vehicles Yes No Yes, Yes Asset

1560 Computer/Software Yes No Yes, Yes Asset

1570 Asset Clearing Yes No Yes, Yes Asset

2210 Accounts Payable Yes No Yes, Yes Liability

2225 Accrued Expenses Payable Yes No Yes, Yes Liability

2990 Suspense Yes No Yes, Yes Liability

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




Budgeting /Posting

Account Type

Reconcile = Yes

3310 Retained Earnings Yes No Yes, Yes Ownership/Stock

3500 Translation Adjust Yes No Yes, Yes Ownership/Stock

4100 Total Revenue Yes Yes No, No Revenue

4110 Hardware Sales Yes No Yes, Yes Revenue

4120 Support Contracts Yes No Yes, Yes Revenue

4130 Training Yes No Yes, Yes Revenue

5100 Total Expense Yes Yes No, No Expense

5105 Salaries Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

5150 Commission Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

5510 Telephone Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

5520 Postage Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

5650 Bad Debt Expense Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

5750 Health and Welfare Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

7640 Airfare Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

7690 Meals Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

7990 Rounding Difference Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

7999 Suspense - Manual Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

Reconcile = Yes

8100 Unrealized Gain/Loss Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

9110 Headcount -STAT Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

9930 Default Intercompany Receivable

Yes No Yes, Yes Asset

9940 Default Intercompany Payable

Yes No Yes, Yes Liability

7. Save.

Define Parent Accounts


9. Navigate to the Values window.

• (N) Setup > Financials > Flexfield > Key >Values

10. Find your Department value set and enter child range information:

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



− For the F&A Rollup parent value 1XX.

From To Include

100 199 Child Values Only

− For the MassAllocation Rollup parent value.

From To Include


11. Find your Account value set and enter child range information for the Total Revenue parent account.

From To Include


12. Still on the Account value, enter the child range information for the Total Expense parent account.

From To Include


13. Save.

14. Close the Child Ranges Window.

15. (B)View Hierarchies. Note the account values included by the parent definition.


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution – Enter Values

Enter Values

1. Open the Values window

• (N) Setup > Financials > Flexfield > Key > Values

2. Find your XXCompany value set, enter the values and information for the segment. Note that for each value you must tab completely through the row to see both Effective Date information and Qualifier information.



01 Domestic Ops Yes No Yes, Yes

02 Europe SA Yes No Yes, Yes

03 Foreign Ops Yes No Yes, Yes

T Total All Companies

Yes Yes No, No

3. (B) Save

4. Click in the Value Set region and click (I) Find.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



5. Find your XXDepartment value set; enter the values and information for the segment. Note that for each value you must tab completely through the row to see both Effective Date Information and Qualifier information.


000 Balance Sheet Yes No Yes, Yes

100 Administration Yes No Yes, Yes

150 Finance Yes No Yes, Yes

175 Advertising Yes No Yes, Yes

210 Production Yes No Yes, Yes

310 Sales & Marketing Yes No Yes, Yes

350 European Sales Yes No Yes, Yes

375 American Sales Yes No Yes, Yes


1XX F&A Rollup Yes Yes No, No

3XX Mass Allocation Rollup

Yes Yes No, No

6. (B) Save


8. Find your XXAccount value set.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



9. Enter the values for the XXAccount segment.


Budgeting /Posting

Account Type

1110 Cash Yes No Yes, Yes Asset

1210 Accounts Receivable Yes No Yes, Yes Asset

1260 Allowance for Bad Debt Yes No Yes, Yes Asset

1550 Vehicles Yes No Yes, Yes Asset

1560 Computer/Software Yes No Yes, Yes Asset

1570 Asset Clearing Yes No Yes, Yes Asset

2210 Accounts Payable Yes No Yes, Yes Liability

2225 Accrued Expenses Payable Yes No Yes, Yes Liability

2990 Suspense Yes No Yes, Yes Liability

Reconcile = Yes

3310 Retained Earnings Yes No Yes, Yes Ownership/Stock

3500 Translation Adjust Yes No Yes, Yes Ownership/Stock

4100 Total Revenue Yes Yes No, No Revenue

4110 Hardware Sales Yes No Yes, Yes Revenue

4120 Support Contracts Yes No Yes, Yes Revenue

4130 Training Yes No Yes, Yes Revenue

5100 Total Expense Yes Yes No, No Expense

5105 Salaries Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

5150 Commission Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

5510 Telephone Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

5520 Postage Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

5650 Bad Debt Expense Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

5750 Health and Welfare Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

7640 Airfare Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

7690 Meals Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

7990 Rounding Difference Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

7999 Suspense - Manual Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

Reconcile = Yes

8100 Unrealized Gain/Loss Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

9110 Headcount -STAT Yes No Yes, Yes Expense

9930 Default Intercompany Yes No Yes, Yes Asset

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




Budgeting /Posting

Account Type

Receivable

9940 Default Intercompany Payable

Yes No Yes, Yes Liability

10. (B) Save.

Define Parent Accounts


12. Find your XXDepartment value set.

13. Find your Department value set and enter child range information for the 3XX parent value. − For the MassAllocation Rollup parent value.

• (B) Define Child Ranges, enter the following:

From To Include


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



14. Save and close Child Ranges window.

15. From the Segment Values window for your Department value set, select the F&A Rollup parent value 1XX.


From To Include


16. Save and close the Child Ranges window.

17. Find your Account value set and enter child range information for the 4100 Total Revenue parent account.


From To Include


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




19. From the Segment Values window for your Account value, enter the child range information for the 5100 Total Expense parent account.


From To Include



21. (B)View Hierarchies. Note the account values included by the parent definition.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




• Verify the hierarchy compiles.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define an Accounting Calendar

Overview

In this practice, you will create an accounting calendar.

Assumptions



Tasks

Define a Period Type


2. Navigate to the Types window.

• (N) Setup > Financials > Calendars > Types − Period Type = XXMonth − Periods per Year = 13 − Year Type = Calendar − Description = 12 Periods and 1 Adjusting

Define the Accounting Calendar

You will be converting balances into the last period of the prior year.

3. Navigate to the Calendar definition window.

• (N) Setup > Financials> Calendars > Accounting − Name = XXAccounting − Description = XXAccounting Calendar

4. Define periods according to the following table (Replace X with the last digit of the prior calendar year and replace Y with the last digit of the current year. Also, make sure February has the correct number of days):

Prefix Type Year Qtr Num From To Adj

Dec XXMonth 200X 4 12 01-Dec-200X 31-Dec-200X

Adj XXMonth 200X 4 13 31-Dec-200X 31-Dec-200X Yes

Jan XXMonth 200Y 1 1 01-Jan-200Y 31-Jan-200Y

Feb XXMonth 200Y 1 2 01-Feb-200Y 29-Feb-200Y

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Mar XXMonth 200Y 1 3 01-Mar-200Y 31-Mar-200Y

Apr XXMonth 200Y 2 4 01-Apr-200Y 30-Apr-200Y

May XXMonth 200Y 2 5 01-May-200Y 31-May-200Y

Jun XXMonth 200Y 2 6 01-Jun-200Y 30-Jun-200Y

Jul XXMonth 200Y 3 7 01-Jul-200Y 31-Jul-200Y

Aug XXMonth 200Y 3 8 01-Aug-200Y 31-Aug-200Y

Sep XXMonth 200Y 3 9 01-Sep-200Y 30-Sep-200Y

Oct XXMonth 200Y 4 10 01-Oct-200Y 31-Oct-200Y

Nov XXMonth 200Y 4 11 01-Nov-200Y 30-Nov-200Y

Dec XXMonth 200Y 4 12 01-Dec-200Y 31-Dec-200Y

Adj XXMonth 200Y 4 13 31-Dec-200Y 31-Dec-200Y Yes

5. Save.

6. Close the Accounting Calendar window and validate the current calendar.

7. Note your concurrent request ID.

View Calendar Audit Report

8. Verify No Violations are found.

Note: Once a calendar has been opened, you cannot amend the periods. If budgets are going to be defined for multiple years, then the calendar must exist for that number of years. All financial programs and sub-ledgers (except Fixed Assets) use the calendar created in General Ledger, although the opening and closing of the periods is maintained within each application.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Define an Accounting Calendar

Tasks

Define a Period Type


2. Navigate to the Types window.

• (N) Setup > Financials > Calendars > Types − Period Type = XXMonth − Periods per Year = 13 − Year Type = Calendar − Description = 12 Periods and 1 Adjusting

3. (I) Save

4. Close the Period Types window.

Define the Accounting Calendar

You will be converting balances into the last period of the prior year.

5. Navigate to the Calendar definition window.

• (N) Setup > Financials > Calendars > Accounting − Name = XXAccounting − Description = XXAccounting Calendar

6. Define periods according to the following table (Replace X with the last digit of the prior calendar year and replace Y with the last digit of the current year. Also, make sure February has the correct number of days):

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Prefix Type Year Qtr Num From To Adj

Dec XXMonth 200X 4 12 01-Dec-200X 31-Dec-200X

Adj XXMonth 200X 4 13 31-Dec-200X 31-Dec-200X Yes

Jan XXMonth 200Y 1 1 01-Jan-200Y 31-Jan-200Y

Feb XXMonth 200Y 1 2 01-Feb-200Y 29-Feb-200Y

Mar XXMonth 200Y 1 3 01-Mar-200Y 31-Mar-200Y

Apr XXMonth 200Y 2 4 01-Apr-200Y 30-Apr-200Y

May XXMonth 200Y 2 5 01-May-200Y 31-May-200Y

Jun XXMonth 200Y 2 6 01-Jun-200Y 30-Jun-200Y

Jul XXMonth 200Y 3 7 01-Jul-200Y 31-Jul-200Y

Aug XXMonth 200Y 3 8 01-Aug-200Y 31-Aug-200Y

Sep XXMonth 200Y 3 9 01-Sep-200Y 30-Sep-200Y

Oct XXMonth 200Y 4 10 01-Oct-200Y 31-Oct-200Y

Nov XXMonth 200Y 4 11 01-Nov-200Y 30-Nov-200Y

Dec XXMonth 200Y 4 12 01-Dec-200Y 31-Dec-200Y

Adj XXMonth 200Y 4 13 31-Dec-200Y 31-Dec-200Y Yes

7. (I) Save

8. Close the Accounting Calendar window.

9. Validate the current calendar, by selecting the (B) Current in the pop-up window.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



10. Note your concurrent request ID. Click (B) OK.

If a Request ID is not generated when you close the Accounting Calendar window, you can manually submit the “Other – Calendar Validation” request from the Standard Request Submission (SRS) window.

View Calendar Audit Report

11. (M) View > Requests

12. (B) Find

13. Click (B) Refresh Data until the request completes.

14. Select the Other – Calendar Validation request.

15. (B) View Output

16. Verify No Violations are found.

Note: Once a calendar has been opened, you cannot amend the periods. If budgets are going to be defined for multiple years, then the calendar must exist for that number of years. All financial programs and sub-ledgers (except Fixed Assets) use the calendar created in General Ledger, although the opening and closing of the periods is maintained within each application.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Verify Functional Currencies are Enabled

Overview

In this practice, you will verify functional currencies are enabled.

Assumptions



Tasks

Verify Functional Currencies are Enabled


2. Navigate to the Define Currencies window.

• (N) Setup > Currencies > Define

3. [F11] to enter query mode − Scroll over to the far right and check the Enabled box.

4. [Ctrl+F11] to execute the query.

5. Verify the USD currency is enabled.

6. Ensure the following currencies are also enabled – GBP, EUR and STAT.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Verify Functional Currencies are Enabled

Tasks

Verify Functional Currencies are Enabled


2. Navigate to the Define Currencies window.


3. [F11] to enter query mode − Scroll over to the far right and check the Enabled box.

4. [Ctrl+F11] to execute the query.

5. Verify the USD currency is enabled.

6. Ensure the following currencies are also enabled – GBP, EUR and STAT.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Guided Demonstration - Ledger Set Processing

Logon: SSCNEWALL/Welcome

Responsibility: General Ledger, SSC Worldwide

SSC US wants to minimize the overhead of maintaining separate ledgers and would like to take advantage of processing and reporting efficiencies afforded by ledger sets, such as being able to open and close periods for multiple ledgers simultaneously and running reports across multiple ledgers in a single financial statement. SSC US is also a shared service center and performs many accounting functions across its subsidiaries and therefore wants to access multiple ledgers from a single responsibility.

Open Periods for a Ledger Set

1. Open the SRS window.

(N) Reports > Request > Standard

2. Submit the Open Period program for:

• Ledger Set: SSC All

• Period Name: (Current Period)

3. View your requests. You will notice that a separate Open Period programs are launched for each ledger in the ledger set.

Open Periods for SCC French Secondary Ledger

4. Switch responsibilities to General Ledger, SSC France (2ndary local COA). This responsibility has the SSC French Secondary Ledger assigned to it.

5. Open the current period for the SSC France SL (EUR) ledger.

Access Multiple Ledgers from a Single Responsibility for Journal Entry

6. Switch responsibilities back to General Ledger, SSC Worldwide. This responsibility has the Ledger Set assigned to it.

7. Open the Enter Journals form to see that you can access multiple ledgers assigned to your ledger set from a single responsibility. See the effect of assigning specific balancing segment values to legal entities when entering journals.

8. Open the Enter Journals form (N) Journals > Enter

9. Select New Journal

10. Enter the Journal Name "<Your Initials> Exercise 3 Rent"

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



11. In the Ledger field, open the list of values and notice that all 5 ledgers assigned to your ledger set are available for selection.

12. Select the SSC France primary ledger for the selected period.

13. Enter the following journal line: Journal <Your Initials> Exercise 3 Rent

Ledger SSC France

Category Adjustment

Period (Current Period)

Currency EUR

Line Account Debit Credit

1 102.100.63510.0000.110.000.000

14. You should receive an error message because remember you assigned balancing segment value 101 to SSC France. Value 102 is incorrect because that belongs to Italy.

15. Change the journal lines as follows to correctly record Rent expense: Line Account Debit (EUR) Credit (EUR) 1 101.100.63510.0000.110.000.000 10,000 SSC France. Division 100. Office Rent. None. Building. None. None 2 101.100.21100.0000.000.000.000 10,000 SSC France.Division 100.Payable to Bank.None.Balance Sheet.None.None

16. Post this journal. Wait for the posting process to complete.

View Replicated Reporting Currency Journal

17. From the Find Journals window enter the following search criteria:

18. Batch name: "%<Your Initials> Exercise 3%"

19. Period: (Current Period)

20. You should see 2 posted journals; one for the Primary Ledger and another for the Reporting Currency.

21. Use Folder Tools to insert the "Ledger" column so you can better view the ledger name of each journal.

22. Notice how both ledger journals are combined in the same batch.

23. Review the journal for the Reporting Currency. Notice the journal was converted to USD.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



View Replicated Secondary Ledger Journal

24. Switch responsibilities to General Ledger, SSC France(2ndary local COA). This responsibility has the SSC French Secondary Ledger assigned to it.

25. Open the Enter Journals form and find the same journal.

26. Review the journal. Notice how different accounts are used because the SL uses a different account segment.

27. If this journal is not posted, then post it now. (Note: The Post Journal Automatically flag may not be set to Yes for this Secondary Ledger).

View Account Balance for Secondary Ledger and Drill Back to Primary Ledger Journal

Prerequisite: Posting must be complete from the previous step.

Instructions: Perform an account inquiry for the Secondary Ledger and drill back to the Primary Ledger.

28. From the General Ledger, SSC France (2ndary local COA) responsibility, open the Account Inquiry form.

(N) Inquiry > Account

29. Enter the following search:

• Ledger: SSC France SL (EUR)

• Accounting Periods From/To: (enter the current period)

• Account Low/High: 101.100.613200.0000.110.000.000.000

30. Click Show Balance > Journal Details > Drilldown

31. You are now viewing the original that was entered in the SSC France Primary Ledger. Notice account value 63510 is shown.

Note: For balances originating from subledgers, you can drill down to the original subledger transaction that was entered in the Primary Ledger as well.

To see how drilling down from Secondary Ledgers to subledgers works, query the following:

• Ledger: SSC France SL (EUR)

• Accounting Periods From/To: (enter 02-08)

• Account Low/High: 101.100.401009.0000.000.000.000.000

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



32. When you get to the Subledger Accounting page, click the View Transaction button.

View Account Balances across Ledgers in a Ledger Set

Instructions: Perform an account inquiry using Account Analysis and Drilldown to view balances across ledgers in a ledger set.

33. Change responsibilities, to General Ledger, SSC Worldwide.

34. Open the Account Analysis and Drilldown window.

(N) Inquiry > Account Analysis and Drilldown

35. Perform an account inquiry using the following criteria: Field Value Field Value

Ledger/Ledger Set SSC All Period From 12-06

Ledger Currency All Currencies (defaults) Period To 12-06

Account From 001.100.11100.0000.000.000.000 Display Summary Accounts

No

Account To 102.200.11100.0000.000.000.000 Display Accounts With No Activity

Yes

Balance Type Actual

Currency Total

36. (B) Go. Balances for all 5 ledgers should be returned to look something like this:

Note: Balances for each ledger are being returned. We are not summarizing balances across ledgers. The only way to summarize balances across ledger is via FSG reports. Any summarization would be misleading when multiple currencies are represented.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define a Ledger (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will define an accounting setup for one legal entity in the US. The primary ledger will act as the corporate representation or main bookkeeping ledger that uses the corporate chart of accounts, calendar, and accounting method. However, the parent company is located in the UK, and therefore a reporting currency in GBP is required for consolidation purposes. The parent company wants the reporting currency to be a journal level reporting currency.

Assumptions



Tasks

Create a Legal Entity


1. Create Legal Entity − Territory = United States − Legal Entity Name = XXVision Corporation − Organization Name = XXVision Corporation − Legal Entity Identifier = XXSYS1000 − EIN/TIN = XX1234567 − Transaction Entity = Yes

2. Create a New Address = Selected − You choose the address

Create Accounting Setup

3. Add Another Row − Legal Entity = XXVision Corporation

Define a Primary Ledger

Name Chart of Accounts Accounting

Calendar Currency Subledger

Accounting Method

XXLedger Operations Accounting Flex

Accounting (choose Month)

USD Standard Accrual

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Assign Reporting Currency

4. Enter Currency, GBP.

5. Choose Journal as the Currency Conversion Level.

Complete Ledger Options

6. (B) Define Accounting Options

7. Locate the Ledger Options setup step and select the Pencil Icon to update − First Ever Opened Period = Dec-XX (where XX is last year) − Future Periods = 2

8. (B) Next − Retained Earnings = 01-000-3310-0000-000 − Suspense Account = 01-000-2990-0000-000 − Rounding Difference Tracking Account = 01-000-7826-0000-000 − Cumulative Translation Adjustment Account = 01-000-3500-00

9. Ensure the status has a green checkmark indicating the setup step is complete.

Complete Reporting Currencies

10. Click the Pencil icon to update your reporting currency.

11. Enter the following: − Default Rate Type = Corporate

12. Ensure the status has a green checkmark indicating the setup step is complete.

13. Complete Accounting Setup

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution – Define a Ledger (Required)


Create a Legal Entity

1. (N) Setup > Financials > Accounting Setup Manager > Accounting Setups.

2. (Tab) Legal Entities

3. (B) Create Legal Entity − Territory = United States − Legal Entity Name = XXVision Corporation − Organization Name = XXVision Corporation − Legal Entity Identifier = XXSYS1000 − EIN/TIN = XX1234567 − Transaction Entity = Yes

4. Create a New Address = Selected − Location = XXLocation − You create the address

5. (B) Apply

Create Accounting Setup

6. (Tab) Accounting Setups

7. (B) Create Accounting Setup

8. (B) Add Another Row − Legal Entity = XXVision Corporation

9. (B) Next

Define a Primary Ledger

Name Chart of Accounts Accounting Calendar

CurrencySubledger

Accounting Method

XXLedger Operations Accounting Flex

Accounting (choose Month)

USD Standard Accrual

Assign Reporting Currency

10. (I) Add Reporting Currency

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



11. (B) Add Another Row. Field Name Value

Currency USD

Currency Conversion Level Journal

12. (B) Apply.

13. (B) Next

14. (B) Finish

Complete Ledger Options

15. (B) Define Accounting Options

16. Locate the Ledger Options setup step and select the Pencil Icon to update

Field Name Value

First Ever Opened Period Dec-XX (where XX is last year)

Future Periods 2

17. (B) Next

Field Name Value

Retained Earnings 01-000-3310-0000-000

Suspense Account 01-000-2990-0000-000

Rounding Difference Tracking Account 01-000-7826-0000-000

Cumulative Translation Adjustment Account 01-000-3500-0000-000

Note: When you enter an account combination, click the Search button and then select the combination. If no combination is found, click the Create button to create the combination and then select it.

18. (B) Next

19. Enable Journal Reconciliation checkbox.

20. (B) Next

21. (B) Finish

22. Ensure the Status has a green checkmark indicating the setup step is complete.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Complete Reporting Currencies

23. Locate the Reporting Currencies setup step and click the Pencil icon to update your reporting currencies.

24. Click the Pencil icon to update your reporting currency.

25. Enter the following:

Field Name Value

Default Rate Type Corporate

Retain Transaction Rate Type Yes

Note: If Retain Transaction Rate Type is set to No, your multi-currency journal will not post.

26. (B) Apply

27. (B) Complete

28. Ensure the Status has a green checkmark indicating the setup step is complete.

Complete Accounting Setup

29. (B) Complete

30. Click (B) Yes to acknowledge the warning message.

31. Click (I) Home to return to the Navigator.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Create a Responsibility for the Controller (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will view the system-generated data access sets that were created when you created your primary ledger and reporting currency using Accounting Setup Manager. Then you will create a new responsibility that will be associated with the system-generated data access set..

Assumptions



Tasks

View System-Generated Data Access Sets


2. Navigate to the Data Access Sets window.

• (N) Setup > Financials > Data Access Sets

3. Click in Data Access Set Field and query all data access sets that start with assigned XX%.

4. Two data access sets should have been created based on ledger names: − One should include both the primary ledger and journal level reporting currency.

This will be the one that you assign to a responsibility to use for journal entry. − The other should only include the reporting currency.

System generated data access sets are displayed as read only and provide full read and write access to the ledgers.

Create a Responsibility

5. Responsibility = System Administrator

6. Navigate to the Responsibilities window − Responsibility = XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER − Application = General Ledger − Responsibility Key = XXLEDGER

Fill in Data Group Details

7. Fill in Data Group details

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



− Name = Standard − Application = General Ledger

Assign a Menu

8. Assign a menu. − Menu = GL_SUPERUSER

Fill in Request Group Details

9. Fill in request group details. − Name = GL Concurrent Program Group − Application = General Ledger

10. Save.

Assign Data Access Set to Responsibility

Associate your Ledger with your newly created responsibility.

11. Navigate to the System Profile Options window − Responsibility = XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER − Profile = GL: Data Access Set

12. Click in Responsibility field − XXLedger

13. Save.

Attach the Responsibility to Your User

14. Navigate to the Define Users window.

15. Query your user.

16. Add the XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER responsibility with a security group of Standard.

17. Save.

18. Switch your responsibility. − Responsibility = XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER

Note: When you’ve selected your responsibility, the Enter Journals screen (N) Journals > Enter) will display the data access set in parentheses in the title bar.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Create a Responsibility for the Controller (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will view the system-generated data access sets that were created when you created your primary ledger and reporting currency using Accounting Setup Manager. Then you will create a new responsibility that will be associated with the system-generated data access set..

Assumptions



Tasks

View System-Generated Data Access Sets

1. Responsibility = General Ledger, Vision Operations


• (N) Setup > Financials > Data Access Sets

3. Click in Data Access Set Field and query all data access sets that start with assigned XX%.

4. Two data access sets should have been created: − One should include both the primary ledger and journal level reporting currency.

This will be the one that you assign to a responsibility to use for journal entry. − The other should only include the reporting currency.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



System generated data access sets are displayed as read only and provide full read and write access to the ledgers.

Create a Responsibility

5. Responsibility = System Administrator

6. Navigate to the Responsibilities window

• (N) Security > Responsibility > Define − Responsibility = XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER − Application = General Ledger − Responsibility Key = XXLEDGER

Fill in Data Group Details

7. Fill in Data Group details. − Name = Standard − Application = General Ledger

Assign a Menu

8. Assign a menu. − Menu = GL_SUPERUSER

Fill in Request Group Details

9. Fill in request group details. − Name = GL Concurrent Program Group − Application = General Ledger

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



10. Save.



Associate your Ledger with your newly created responsibility.

12. Navigate to the System Profile Options window

• (N) Profile > System − Responsibility = XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER − Profile = GL: Data Access Set

13. (B) Find

14. Click (B) OK to acknowledge Note.

15. Click in the Responsibility field. − Select XXLedger

16. Save.

Attach the Responsibility to Your User

17. Navigate to the Define Users window.

• (N) Security > User > Define

18. Query your user.

19. Add the XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER responsibility with a security group of Standard

20. Save.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



21. Switch your responsibility.

• (M) File > Switch Responsibility − Responsibility = XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER

Note: When you’ve selected your responsibility, the Enter Journals screen (N) Journals > Enter) will display the data access set in parentheses in the title bar.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - View Account Combinations Created with Dynamic Insertion

Assumptions



• Responsibility = XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER

Tasks

1. View account combinations Created with Dynamic Insertion

• (N) Setup > Accounts > Combinations

Note: If dynamic insertion is not enabled, you will have to define your account combinations prior to being able to use them. One option is to temporarily turn dynamic insertion on and load a 0 amount journal entry using Web ADI with all account combinations you plan to use. Dynamic insertion will create the account combinations for you; you can then turn dynamic insertion off. The journal entry can be deleted if desired.

If you work with Oracle Applications that generate a lot of new account combinations (e.g. Oracle Assets), consider your decision to use (or not use) dynamic insertion carefully.

Also, if you will be using Oracle Projects or Grants, dynamic insertion must be turned on. The Auto Accounting feature used in Oracle Projects and Oracle Grants checks to verify that dynamic insertion is on. If it is not, you will not be able to create journal entries from PA.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - View Account Combinations Created with Dynamic Insertion

Tasks

View account combinations Created with Dynamic Insertion

1. Open the Account Combinations window.


2. [Ctrl + F11] to query all combinations.

Note: account combinations were dynamically created.

3. Close the GL Accounts window. O

racl

e U

nive

rsity

and

New

Hor

izon

s C

ompu

ter L

earn

ing

Cen

ters

- Ab

u D

habi

use

onl

y

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Create a Security Rule

Overview

Segment Value Security rules restrict access to specific segment values based on the user’s responsibility. Define a rule that removes the use of Department 210, and attach the rule to your XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER responsibility. In this practice, you will create a security rule.

Assumptions



• Responsibility = XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER − (N) Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Key > Security > Define

Tasks

1. Find the Department Segment in your Accounting Key Flexfield Structure.

2. Define Security Rules. − Name = XXFFS − Description = Department 210 restriction rule − Message = XXFFS - Dept. 210 is not valid for this responsibility

3. Define Rule Elements.

• Define rule elements − Include = 000 - ZZZ − Exclude = 210 - 210

4. Assign the Rule to the XX General Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER Responsibility.

• (B) Assign − Application = General Ledger − Responsibility = XX General Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER − Name = XXFFS

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution – Create a Security Rule

Tasks

Responsibility = XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER

Find the Department Segment in your Accounting Key Flexfield Structure

1. Open the Security Rules definition window.

• (N) Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Key > Security > Define − Find Values By = Key Flexfield − Title = Accounting Flexfield − Structure = XX_Accounting_Flexfield − Segment = Department

2. (B) Find

Define Security Rules

3. Define a security rule. − Name = XXFFS − Description = Department 210 restriction rule − Message = XXFFS - Dept. 210 is not valid for this responsibility

4. (I) Save

Define Rule Elements

5. Define rule elements. − Include = 000 - ZZZ − Exclude = 210 - 210

6. (I) Save

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Assign the Rule to a Responsibility

7. (B) Assign − Application = General Ledger − Responsibility = XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLedger − Name = XXFFS

8. (I) Save


Note: Your rule will be tested later.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define Cross Validation Rules

Overview

Cross Validation Rules determine which combinations of valid segment values are invalid, regardless of the user's responsibility because cross validation rules are defined at the chart of accounts level. It is a good idea to use combinations of several simple rules rather than a few "all encompassing" rules. Keep in mind that Cross Validation rules are linked to a flexfield structure (chart of accounts); security rules are linked to a responsibility. In this practice, you will define cross validation rules.

Example:

Goal: Prevent balance sheet accounts (0000-3999) from being usedwith anything but the balance sheet department (000). Allow 000 to bepaired with 9930 to 9940.

Include

Exclude

Exclude

Exclude 00 - 000 - 4000 - 0000ZZ - 000 - 9929 - ZZZZ

00 - 000 - 0000 - 0000ZZ - ZZZ - ZZZZ - ZZZZ

00 - 000 - 9941 - 0000ZZ - 000 - ZZZZ - ZZZZ

00 - 001 - 0000 - 0000ZZ - ZZZ - 3999 - ZZZZ

You will implement three rules as a test to the system:

Rule Purpose

Commission Rule Prevent the Administration (100) and Finance (150) departments from receiving commission payments (Account 5150)

Balance Sheet Rule Prevent balance sheet account codes from being used with anything but balance sheet departments (and similarly with P&L account codes and departments)

Revenue Rule Allow only sales departments (300 to 3ZZ) to be used with revenue account codes (4000 range)

Assumptions



Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Tasks

Query Your Flexfield Structure

1. Responsibility = XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER

2. Navigate to the Key Rules window.

3. Query your flexfield structure.

Define the Commission Rule

4. Define the commission rule. − Rule = XXCVR01 − Description = Account 5150 is not valid with Administration (100) and Finance

(150) − Error Message = XXCVR01 - Account 5150 is not valid with the Administration

(100) and Finance (150) departments − Error Segment = Account − From = 31-JAN-2001

Include/Exclude From To

Include 00.000.0000.00 ZZ.ZZZ.ZZZZ.ZZ

Exclude 00.100.5150.00 ZZ.100.5150.ZZ

Exclude 00.150.5150.00 ZZ.150.5150.ZZ

Define the Balance Sheet Rule

5. Create Rule XXCVR02 for the Balance Sheet Rule. Remember to include a description, error message, identify the segment name, start date, and use the following information.

− Rule = XXCVR02 − Description = Balance sheet accounts and income statement accounts must be used

with appropriate departments − Error Message = XXCVR02 - Balance sheet and income statement accounts must be

used with appropriate departments. − Error Segment Name = Department − From = 31-JAN-2001



Exclude 00.000.4000.00 ZZ.000.9929.ZZ

Exclude 00.000.9941.00 ZZ.000.ZZZZ.ZZ

Note: 9930 is not being excluded because it will be used with department 000 for the default balancing account.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Define the Revenue Rule

6. Create Rule XXCVR03 for the Revenue Rule. Remember to include a description, error message, identify the segment name, start date, and use the following information.

− Rule = XXCVR03 − Description = Allow only sales departments (300 to 3ZZ) to be used with revenue

account codes (4000 range) − Error Message = XXCVR03 - Only sales departments (300 to 3ZZ) may be used

with revenue account codes (4000 range) − Error Segment Name = Department − From = 31-JAN-2001



Exclude 00.000.4000.00 ZZ.299.4ZZZ.ZZ

Exclude 00.400.4000.00 ZZ.ZZZ.4ZZZ.ZZ

7. Save and close windows until you are back at the Navigator.

Note: In 11i10 and prior, it was necessary to re-choose the responsibility to activate the cross validation rule. That is no longer necessary in R12.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Define Cross Validation Rules (Required)

Overview

Cross Validation Rules determine which combinations of valid segment values are invalid, regardless of the user's responsibility because cross validation rules are defined at the chart of accounts level. It is a good idea to use combinations of several simple rules rather than a few "all encompassing" rules. Keep in mind that Cross Validation rules are linked to a flexfield structure (chart of accounts); security rules are linked to a responsibility. In this practice, you will define cross validation rules.

Example:

Goal: Prevent balance sheet accounts (0000-3999) from being usedwith anything but the balance sheet department (000). Allow 000 to bepaired with 9930 to 9940.

Include

Exclude

Exclude

Exclude 00 - 000 - 4000 - 0000ZZ - 000 - 9929 - ZZZZ

00 - 000 - 0000 - 0000ZZ - ZZZ - ZZZZ - ZZZZ

00 - 000 - 9941 - 0000ZZ - 000 - ZZZZ - ZZZZ

00 - 001 - 0000 - 0000ZZ - ZZZ - 3999 - ZZZZ

You will implement three rules as a test to the system:

Rule Purpose

Commission Rule Prevent the Administration (100) and Finance (150) departments from receiving commission payments (Account 5150)

Balance Sheet Rule Prevent balance sheet account codes from being used with anything but balance sheet departments (and similarly with P&L account codes and departments)

Revenue Rule Allow only sales departments (300 to 3ZZ) to be used with revenue account codes (4000 range)

Assumptions



Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Tasks

Query Your Flexfield Structure


2. Navigate to the Key Rules window.

• (N) Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Key > Rules

3. Query your flexfield structure. − F11 − Application = Gen% − Flexfield Title = Acc% − Structure = XX% − Ctrl + F11

Define the Commission Rule

4. Define the commission rule. − Rule = XXCVR01 − Description = Account 5150 is not valid with Administration (100) and Finance

(150) − Error Message = XXCVR01 - Account 5150 is not valid with the Administration

(100) and Finance (150) departments − Error Segment = Account − From = 01-JAN-2008



Exclude 00.100.5150.00 ZZ.100.5150.ZZ

Exclude 00.150.5150.00 ZZ.150.5150.ZZ

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



5. Save.

Define the Balance Sheet Rule

6. Create Rule XXCVR02 for the Balance Sheet Rule. Remember to include a description, error message, identify the segment name, start date, and use the following information.

− Rule = XXCVR02 − Description = Balance sheet accounts and income statement accounts must be used

with appropriate departments − Error Message = XXCVR02 - Balance sheet and income statement accounts must be

used with appropriate departments. − Error Segment Name = Department − From = 01-JAN-2008



Exclude 00.000.4000.00 ZZ.000.9929.ZZ

Exclude 00.000.9941.00 ZZ.000.ZZZZ.ZZ

Exclude 00.001.0000.00 ZZ.ZZZ.3999.ZZ

Note: 9930 through 9940 are being omitted from the exclude elements because they are reserved for use with department 000 for balancing accounts.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



7. Save

Define the Revenue Rule

8. Create Rule XXCVR03 for the Revenue Rule. Remember to include a description, error message, identify the segment name, start date, and use the following information.

− Rule = XXCVR03 − Description = Allow only sales departments (300 to 3ZZ) to be used with revenue

account codes (4000 range) − Error Message = XXCVR03 - Only sales departments (300 to 3ZZ) may be used

with revenue account codes (4000 range) − Error Segment Name = Department − From = 01-JAN-2008



Exclude 00.000.4000.00 ZZ.299.4ZZZ.ZZ

Exclude 00.400.4000.00 ZZ.ZZZ.4ZZZ.ZZ

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



9. Save and close windows until you are back at the Navigator.

Note: In 11i10 and prior, it was necessary to re-choose the responsibility to activate the cross validation rule. That is no longer necessary in R12.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define and Test Shorthand Aliases

Overview

In this practice, you will define and test shorthand aliases.

Assumptions



Tasks

Verify the Shorthand Aliases Profile Option


2. Navigate to the Profiles window.

3. Query the Flexfields:Shorthand Entry profile option. − User Value = Always

Query the Flexfield Structure

4. Navigate to the Shorthand Aliases window.


Define Shorthand Aliases

6. Define shorthand aliases. − Enabled = Checked − Max Alias Size = 20 − For the prompt, type Shorthand Aliases

7. (T) Aliases, Descriptions

8. Enter full templates for the Bank account, the Accounts Payable account, and Accrued Expenses according to the following table:

Alias Template Alias Description

Cash 01.000.1110.00 Cash

Accounts Payable 01.000.2210.00 Trade Accounts Payable

Accrued Expenses 01.000.2225.00 Accrued Expenses Payable

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



9. Enter partial templates for Salaries, Training Revenue and Commissions according to the following table:


Salaries 01..5105.00 Salaries

Training Revenue 01..4130.00 Training Revenue

Commissions 01..5150.00 Commissions

10. Save.

11. Select OK to acknowledge message and compile the flexfield.


Recompile the Flexfield

13. Navigate to the Key Segments window

(N) Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Key > Segments

14. Query your XXAccounting Flexfield structure.

15. Deselect the Freeze Flexfield definition checkbox.

16. (B) OK in the Caution window.

17. Save − Freeze Flexfield Definition = Checked

18. (B) OK in the Caution window.

19. (B) Compile

Test the Account Aliases

20. Navigate to the Account Combinations window.

21. Place your cursor in the Account field and activate the List of Values.

22. The prompt for the Shorthand Alias should appear.

23. Activate the List of Values in the Shorthand Alias window.

24. View the templates you created.

Disable Account Aliases for Your User


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




27. Query the Flexfields: Shorthand Entry profile option − User Value = Not Enabled

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Define and Test Shorthand Aliases (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will define and test shorthand aliases.

Assumptions



Tasks

Verify the Shorthand Aliases Profile Option



• (N) Other > Profile

3. Query the Flexfields:Shorthand Entry profile option. − User Value = Always

4. Save.

Query the Flexfield Structure

5. Navigate to the Shorthand Aliases window.

• (N) Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Key > Aliases

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




Define Shorthand Aliases

7. Define shorthand aliases. − Enabled = Checked − Max Alias Size = 20 − For the prompt, type Shorthand Aliases

8. (T) Aliases, Descriptions

9. Enter full templates for the Bank account, the Accounts Payable account, and Accrued Expenses according to the following table:


Cash 01.000.1110.00 Cash

Accounts Payable 01.000.2210.00 Trade Accounts Payable

Accrued Expenses 01.000.2225.00 Accrued Expenses Payable

10. Enter partial templates for Salaries, Training Revenue and Bonuses according to the following table:


Salaries 01..5105.00 Salaries

Training Revenue 01..4130.00 Training Revenue

Commissions 01..5150.00 Commissions

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



11. Save.

12. (B) OK to acknowledge message to compile the flexfield.


Recompile the Flexfield

14. Navigate to the Key Segments window.


15. Query your XXAccounting Flexfield structure.

16. Deselect the Freeze Flexfield definition checkbox.

17. Click (B) OK in the Caution window.

18. Save.

19. Verify the Freeze Flexfield Definition box is checked.

20. Click (B) OK in the Caution window.

21. (B) Compile

22. Click (B) OK in the (2) Note windows.


Test the Account Aliases

24. Navigate to the Account Combinations window.


25. Place your cursor in the Account field and activate the List of Values.

26. The prompt for the Shorthand Alias should appear.

27. Activate the List of Values in the Shorthand Alias window. O

racl

e U

nive

rsity

and

New

Hor

izon

s C

ompu

ter L

earn

ing

Cen

ters

- Ab

u D

habi

use

onl

y

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



28. View the templates you created.

Disable Account Aliases for Your User




31. Query the Flexfields: Shorthand Entry profile option. − User Value = Not Enabled

32. Save.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Open the First Accounting Period (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will open the first accounting period for your primary ledger and its reporting currency.

Assumptions



Tasks

Open the First Accounting Period

You will convert summary balances into December of the prior accounting year and detail balances for each period until cutover. The cutover period will be the current calendar month. Open the appropriate periods for both the primary ledger and its reporting currency.

Note: Translation cannot be performed in the first open period.


2. Navigate to the Open and Close Periods window. − Ledger = XX Ledger − First Period = The earliest available period for your ledger will default. − Ledger = XX Ledger (GBP)

Note: This is the journal level reporting currency. In order to prevent problems during posting, you should keep the periods for both the source ledger and its reporting currency in sync.

− First Period = The First Ever Opened Period defined for your primary ledger will default.

3. Close the Open/Close periods window and monitor the concurrent requests until they complete. (Hint: Use (M) View > Requests).

4. Navigate back to the Open and Close Periods window.

5. Click (B) Find to find all periods. − Accept the default values for the Ledger and Status fields. − Click (B) Open Period to open a range of period(s). − In the Target Period field, select the current period to open.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Note: After specifying the Target Period and selecting (B) Open Period, all periods up to and including the Target Period will be open. This is a change from prior versions of Oracle Applications where each period had to be opened individually and consecutively.

6. Verify the process completed without error and the periods are open and future enterable.

7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for the reporting currency.

Note: You should limit the number of periods you have open in order to improve posting performance. This is particularly useful during implementations when you are uploading balances from a legacy system. Instead of having a year's worth of periods open as you are uploading and posting to each period, open a couple of periods and have a high number of future-enterable periods defined for your ledger.

Note: The number of future-enterable periods can be changed at any time in the Ledger Options window in Accounting Setup Manager. After you have uploaded the balances for all the periods, post the journals, then close older periods.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Open the First Accounting Period (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will open the first accounting period for your primary ledger and its reporting currency.

Assumptions



Tasks

Open the First Accounting Period

You will convert summary balances into December of the prior accounting year and detail balances for each period until cutover. The cutover period will be the current calendar month. Open the appropriate periods for both the primary ledger and its reporting currency.

Note: Translation cannot be performed in the first open period.


2. Navigate to the Open and Close Periods window.

• (N) Setup > Open/Close − Ledger = XX Ledger

• (B) Find − First Period = The earliest available period for your ledger will default.

• (B) Open

• Click (B) Yes in the Decision window.

• Click (B) OK to acknowledge concurrent request ID.

• (I) Find − Ledger = XX Ledger (GBP)

Note: This is the journal level reporting currency. In order to prevent problems during posting, you should keep the periods for both the source ledger and its reporting currency in synch.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



• (B) Find − First Period = The First Ever Opened Period defined for your primary ledger will

default.

• (B) Open

• (B) Yes

• Click (B) OK to acknowledge your concurrent request ID.

3. Close the Open/Close Periods window and monitor the concurrent requests until they complete. (Hint: Use (M) View > Requests).

4. Navigate back to the Open and Close Periods window.

5. Click (B) Find to find all periods. − Accept the default values for the Ledger and Status fields. − Click (B) Open Period to open a range of period(s). − In the Target Period field, select the current period to open.

Note: After specifying the Target Period and selecting (B) Open Period, all periods up to and including the Target Period will be open. This is a change from prior versions of Oracle Applications where each period had to be opened individually and consecutively.

6. (B) Open

7. Click (B) Yes in the Decision window.

8. (B) OK

9. Verify the process completed without error and the periods are open and future enterable.

10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 for the reporting currency.

Note: You should limit the number of periods you have open in order to improve posting performance. This is particularly useful during implementations when you are uploading balances from a legacy system. Instead of having a year's worth of periods open as you are uploading and posting to each period, open a couple of periods and have a high number of future-enterable periods defined for your ledger. After you have uploaded the balances for all the periods, post the journals, then close older periods.

Note: The number of future-enterable periods can be changed at any time in the Ledger Options window in Accounting Setup Manager. O

racl

e U

nive

rsity

and

New

Hor

izon

s C

ompu

ter L

earn

ing

Cen

ters

- Ab

u D

habi

use

onl

y

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Run General Ledger Reports

In this practice, you will run General Ledger reports.

Assumptions



Tasks

1. Submit the Segment Values Listing Report.

2. View the output when your request completes.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Run General Ledger Reports

Tasks

Submit the Segment Values Listing Report

1. Navigate to the Standard Request Submission screen.

• (N) Reports > Request > Standard

2. Submit a single request. − Name = Chart of Accounts - Segment Values Listing − Segment Name = Account − (B) OK − (B) Submit − Note your Request ID − (B) No in Decision window

3. View the output when your request completes.

Hint: (M) View > Requests. O

racl

e U

nive

rsity

and

New

Hor

izon

s C

ompu

ter L

earn

ing

Cen

ters

- Ab

u D

habi

use

onl

y

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Account Hierarchy Manager

Assumptions

• Use Vision database.

• Login information provided by your instructor.

• Replace XX with the number provided by your instructor.

• Use General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA) responsibility.

Tasks

In this practice you will learn how to:

• View an existing hierarchy.

• Create new segment values.

• Duplicate hierarchies.

• Modify descriptions within a hierarchy.

Business Scenario

Modify the Profile Option

Set Profile Option for GL AHM: Allow Users to Modify Hierarchy for responsibility XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER to Yes.

Open the Account Hierarchy Manager

Responsibility: XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER

1. Navigate to (N) Setup > Accounts > Manager.

2. Select Yes in the Confirm window asking if the changes are to be saved.

• Expand the XX_Accounting_Flexfield

• Minimize the window to keep the Account Hierarchy Manager active.

3. Select Department (B) Find.

4. Select (I) New Parent.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



• The Parent Attribute window appears, enter T in the Value field and All Departments in Description field.

5. Select (B) OK.

6. Select the T Value that now appears on the left hand side.

• Select (I) View Hierarchy.

Note the T value does not display any children values on the right hand side, the system automatically associates all children to the T value.

7. Select the 2XX value and (I) View Hierarchy.

Note the value now appears on the right hand side with a (+) plus sign indicating children, expand to see the children associated with this value.

Double click the 2XX value on the left hand side the Parent Attribute window appears.

Note the child ranges appear down below.

8. (B) Cancel or close the window.

9. Highlight the child value 150 (Finance).

• Right click and select Remove.

This will remove the child value from the range.

10. Select the 2XX Value and open the Parent Attribute window.

Note the change in the ranges.

11. (B) Cancel or close window.

12. Select the 150 value on the left side and drag and drop on the Parent Value 2XX on the right hand side.

13. Verify the ranges by double clicking on the Parent Value 2XX.

14. Select the (B) Merge to include all the values between the lowest and highest ranges.

15. (B) Yes to save all changes, which includes the new T Parent Value.

16. (B) OK to Saving Complete.

17. (B) Accept Merge

18. (B) OK

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



19. (B) OK

20. (I) Add New Child

• Child Attribute window appears

21. Enter the following: − Value – 155 − Description- Payables

22. (B) OK

23. Refresh by selecting the Parent Value on the left side and right click and choose View Hierarchy.

24. View the account segment by selecting the (I) Flashlight.

25. Highlight the account segment.

26. (B) Yes to Confirm.

27. (B) OK

28. (B) Find

29. Select an Account and double click to view the attributes.

Note that these attributes can be changed.

30. Exit the Account Hierarchy Manager by closing the window.

31. Click (B) Yes to save the changes.

32. Expand the Oracle General Ledger Account Hierarchy Manager and close the window.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution – Account Hierarchy Manager

Task

In this practice you will learn how to:

• View an existing hierarchy.

• Create new segment values.

• Duplicate hierarchies.

• Modify descriptions within a hierarchy.

Modify the Profile Option

Responsibility = System Administrator

1. Navigate to the System Profile Options window.

• (N) Profile > System − Responsibility = XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER − Profile = GL AHM: Allow Users to Modify Hierarchy

2. (B) Find

• Click (B) OK to acknowledge Note.

3. Set the value to Yes in the responsibility field.

4. Save.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Open the Account Hierarchy Manager

Responsibility: XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER

5. Navigate to (N) Setup > Accounts > Manager.

6. Select Yes in the Confirm window asking if the changes are to be saved.

• Minimize the window to keep the Account Hierarchy Manager active.

• Expand the XX_Accounting_Flexfield

7. Select Department.

• (B) Find

8. Select (I) New Parent.

• The Parent Attribute window appears, enter T in the Value field and All Departments in Description field.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



9. Select (B) OK.

10. Select the T Value that now appears on the left hand side.

• Select (I) View Hierarchy

Note the T value does not display any children values on the right hand side, the system automatically associates all children with the T value.

11. Select the 1XX value and (I) View Hierarchy.

Note the value now appears on the right hand side with a (+) plus sign indicating children are associated with the parent.

Double click the 1XX value on the left hand side the Parent Attribute window appears.

Note the child ranges appear.

(B) Cancel or close the Parent Attribute window.

12. Use the + (plus sign) to expand the list of children associated with the parent value.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



13. Highlight the child value 150 (Finance).

• Right click and select Remove, to remove the child value from the range.

14. Select the 1XX Value and open the Parent Attribute window.

Note the change in the ranges.

• (B) Cancel or close window.

15. Select the 150 value on the left side and drag and drop on the Parent Value 1XX on the right hand side.

• Verify the ranges by double clicking on the Parent Value 1XX.

16. Select the (B) Merge to include all the values between the lowest and highest ranges.

• Click (B) Yes to save all changes, which includes the new T Parent Value.

• Click (B) OK to Saving Complete.

• (B) Accept Merge

17. (B) OK,

18. (B) OK

19. (I) Add New Child

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



• Child Attribute window appears.

20. Enter the following: − Value – 155 − Description- Payables

21. (B) OK

22. Refresh by selecting the Parent Value on the left side and right click and choose View Hierarchy. You may need to close the existing hierarchy view.

23. View the account segment by selecting the (I) Flashlight.

24. Highlight the Account Segment.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



25. Click (B) Yes to Confirm.

26. (B) OK

27. (B) Find

28. Select an Account and double click to view the attributes.

Note that these attributes can be changed.

29. Exit the Account Hierarchy Manager by closing the window.

30. Click (B) Yes to save the changes, if asked.

31. Expand the Oracle General Ledger Account Hierarchy Manager window and then close the window.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Using Accounting Setup Manager

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define Sequencing

Overview

In this practice you will define sequencing in General Ledger.


Your company has just acquired a company called France Outfitters, which is based in France. Regulations in France require that each journal has to be sequenced. You will set up sequencing for the ledger so that all General Ledger journals are sequenced when posted.

Setup Accounting Sequencing (Instructor to Demonstrate the Sequencing Setup)

1. Navigate to Accounting Setup Manager.

2. Update the accounting options for sequencing for the ledger Vision Operations (USA).

3. Setup accounting sequence for Vision Operations (USA).

4. Validate Sequence By Effective Date.

5. Assign Sequence By Effective Date.

Assign Sequences and Create New Sequence

6. Create a new sequence XXSequence.

7. Create a new sequence version XXSequence20YY (YY is the current year) starting on January 1 20YY – December 31, 20YY; with the initial number 1.

8. Assign the sequence XXSequence starting on January 1, 20YY to sequence journal entries for all balance type, all journal source, and all categoriesSolution – Define Sequencing.

Note: If you need to modify the XXSequence you created, you can do so from:

Setup > Financials > Sequences > Accounting > Define

Enter Journal and View Sequences (Students will start the practice at this point)

9. Enter a journal for the current period.

10. Post the journal.

11. View the sequence number generated.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution – Define Sequencing


Setup Accounting Sequencing (Instructor to Demonstrate the Sequencing Setup)

1. Navigate to Accounting Setup Manager.

• (N) Setup > Financials > Accounting Setup Manager > Accounting Setups

2. Search for the ledger you created Vision Operations (USA).

3. (B) Go

4. Click (I) Update Accounting Options for the Vision Operations (USA).

5. Click (I) Update the accounting options for sequencing for the ledger Vision Operations (USA).

6. Setup accounting sequence for Vision Operations (USA) by selecting Ledger Name: Vision Operations (USA).

• Sequence Event-Sequence Entity : Posting - GL Journal Entry

7. (B) Create

8. Validate Sequence By = Journal Effective Date.

9. Assign Sequence By = Journal Effective Date.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Assign Sequences and Create New Sequence

10. (B) Assign Sequences

11. (B) Create Sequence

12. Create a new sequence XXSequence.

13. Create a new sequence version XXSequence20YY (YY is the current year) starting on January 1 20YY – December 31, 20YY; with the initial number 1.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



14. (B) Apply

15. The sequence XXSequence is defaulted to the sequence assignment starting from today. Change the start date to make the sequence assignment to sequence journal entries for All Balance Type, All Journal Source, and All Categories starting on the 1st of January.

16. (B) Apply

Note confirmation information.

• If you need to modify the XXSequence you created, you can do so from:

Setup > Financials > Sequences > Accounting > Define

17. Change Status from In Progress to Complete.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



18. (B) Apply

19. (L) Close Window.

Enter Journal and View Sequences (Students will start the practice at this point)

(N) Journals > Enter > (B) New Journal

20. Enter a journal with the following: − Name = XX Sequence Verification − Period = Accept default with the following accounts and amounts.


10 01-410-5221-21XX-000 4100

20 01-000-2210-21XX-000 4100

21. Save


23. (B) Post > (B) OK to acknowledge concurrent request ID note.

24. Search for the journal you created and click on the Other Information tab.

25. View the sequence number generated.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



26. Close all windows and return to the Navigator.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Guided Demonstration - View Ledger Set



SSC US wants to minimize the overhead of maintaining separate ledgers and would like to take advantage of processing and reporting efficiencies afforded by ledger sets, such as being able to open and close periods for multiple ledgers simultaneously and running reports across multiple ledgers in a single financial statement. SSC US is also a shared service center and performs many accounting functions across its subsidiaries and therefore wants to access multiple ledgers from a single responsibility.

View Ledger Set

(N) Setup > Financials > Ledger Sets

1. Query the ledger set called SSC All.

Notice the following 5 ledgers that are assigned:

Note: The Secondary Ledgers for Italy and France cannot be included because they use a different chart of accounts.

This ledger set is assigned to the responsibility General Ledger, SSC Worldwide.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Basic Journal Entries

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Set up Journal Sources

Overview

In this practice, you will set up journal sources.

Assumptions



Tasks


1. Set Up a Journal Source

• (N) Setup > Journal > Sources − Source = XXPurchasing − Source Key = XXPurchasing − Description = External purchasing accruals − Import Journal references = Checked − Freeze Journals = Checked − Journal Sources Flexfield [ ] = enter details

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Set up Journal Sources

Tasks

Set Up a Journal Source


1. Open the Journal Sources window

• (N) Setup > Journal > Sources − Source = XXPurchasing − Source Key = XXPurchasing − Description = External purchasing accruals − Import Journal references = Checked − Freeze Journals = Yes − Journal Sources Flexfield [ ] = enter details

2. (I) Save


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Set up a Journal Category (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will set up a journal category.

Assumptions



Tasks

Set Up a Journal Category


1. Navigate to the Journal Category window.

• (N) Setup > Journal > Categories − Category = XXAccrual − Category Key = XXAccrual − Description = XXAccrual

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution – Set up a Journal Category (Required)

Tasks


1. Open the Journal Categories window.

• (N) Setup > Journal > Categories − Category = XXAccrual − Category Key = XXAccrual − Description = XXAccrual

2. (I) Save


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Create a Journal Batch (Required)

Overview

You've purchased computers in the current open period. The computers are valued at 85,000, of which the office is paying 5,000 cash and the remainder will be paid over the following year. An additional memo informs you of 135,000 of one-time sales revenues earned by selling these computers. Record the journals for the memos in one batch using a batch control total. In this practice, you will create a batch journal.

Assumptions



Tasks

Record Computer Purchases


2. Navigate to the Journals window.

• (N) Journals > Enter

Note: You may need to use the System Administrator responsibility to set the Sequential Numbering profile option to Not Used for the XX General Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER responsibility to prevent messages regarding sequential numbering when entering new journals.

3. (B) New Batch − Batch = XXComputer Purchases and Sales − Period = Current period − Control Total = 220000

4. (B) Journals − Journal = XXComputer Purchases − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Addition − Currency = USD


Line Account Debit Credit Description

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



10 01-000-1560-21XX-000 85000 Computers and Software

20 01-000-1110-21XX-000 5000 Cash

30 01-000-2210-21XX-000 80000 Accounts Payable

Record Sales on Account

6. Place the cursor in the Journal field.

7. (I) New − Name = XXComputer Sales − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Period = Current period − Category = Revenue − Currency = USD



10 01-000-1210-21XX-000 135000 Accounts Receivable

20 01-420-4110-21XX-000 135000 Hardware Revenue

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Create a Journal Batch (Required)

Tasks

Record Computer Purchases




3. (B) New Batch − Batch = XXComputer Purchases and Sales − Period = Current period − Control Total = 220000

4. (B) Journals − Journal = XXComputer Purchases − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Addition − Currency = USD

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED






20 01-000-1110-21XX-000 5000 Cash


6. (I) Save


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Record Sales on Account

8. Place the cursor in the Journal field.

9. (I) New − Name = XXComputer Sales − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Period = Current period − Category = Revenue − Currency = USD



10 01-000-1210-21XX-000 135000 Accounts Receivable

20 01-420-4110-21XX-000 135000 Hardware Revenue

11. (I) Save


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Create a Second Journal Batch (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will create a journal batch with multiple journals.

Assumptions



Tasks

Create a Journal Batch




3. (B) New Batch − Batch = XXMeals Expense − Control Total = 1000

4. (B) Journals − Journal = XXMeals - Sales & Marketing − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Expenditures − Period = Current period − Currency = Use default currency



10 01-420-7690-21XX-000 500 Meals-Sales & Marketing

20 01-000-1110-21XX-000 500 Cash

6. Create New Journal entry. − Journal = XXMeals - European Sales


10 01-410-7690-21XX-000 300 Meals-European Sales

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




20 01-000-1110-21XX-000 300 Cash

7. Create new journal entry. − Journal = XXMeals - American Sales


10 01-210-7690-21XX-000 200 Meals-American Sales

20 01-000-1110-21XX-000 200 Cash

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Create a Second Journal Batch (Required)

Tasks

Create a Journal Batch




3. (B) New Batch − Batch = XXMeals Expense − Control Total = 1000

4. (B) Journals − Journal = XXMeals - Sales & Marketing − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Expenditures − Period = Current period − Currency = Use default currency



10 01-420-7690-21XX-000 500 Meals-Sales & Marketing

20 01-000-1110-21XX-000 500 Cash

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



6. (I) Save


8. Place cursor in journal header.

9. (M) File > New − Journal = XXMeals - European Sales − Category = Expenditures


10 01-410-7690-21XX-000 300 Meals-European Sales

20 01-000-1110-21XX-000 300 Cash

10. (I) Save


12. Place cursor in journal header.

13. (I) New − Journal = XXMeals - American Sales − Category = Expenditures

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




10 01-210-7690-21XX-000 200 Meals-American Sales

20 01-000-1110-21XX-000 200 Cash

14. (I) Save


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Create a Single Journal (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will create a single journal that will reclass telephone charges from the Finance department to the Facilities department.

Assumptions



Tasks

Create a Single Journal


2. Navigate to the Enter Journals window.


3. (B) New Journal − Journal Name = XXReclass − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Reclass − Period = Current period − Currency = Use default currency

Note: We did not enter a batch name for this batch. The batch name will be created for us.

4. Enter the following journal:


10 01-840-7450-21XX-000 500 Telephone Charges

20 01-730-7450-21XX-000 500 Transfer to Dept. 840

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution – Create a Single Journal (Required)

Tasks





3. (B) New Journal − Journal Name = XXReclass − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Reclass − Period = Current period − Currency = Use default currency




10 01-840-7450-21XX-000 500 Telephone Charges

20 01-730-7450-21XX-000 500 Transfer to Dept. 840

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



5. (I) Save


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Post Journals (Required)

Overview

There are several methods to Post Journals. You can use the Post button, the Post Journals window or Autopost. In this practice, you will use the Post Journals window to post journals.

Assumptions



Tasks

Post Journals using the Post Journals Window


2. Navigate to the Journals Post window.

• (N) Journals > Post

3. (B) Find

4. Select all of your batches and post them.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Post Journals (Required)

Overview

There are several methods to Post Journals. You can use the Post button, the Post Journals window or Autopost. In this practice, you will use the Post Journals window to post journals.

Tasks

Post Journals using the Post Journals Window




3. Click (B) Find (hint: Type %XX% in the batch name field).

4. Select all of your batches (should be 3).

5. Click (B) Post to post selected journals.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



6. (B) OK to acknowledge concurrent request ID.

Two Journal entries are created by this action, one for the Primary Ledger the other for the Reporting Currency Ledger.

7. Repeat Steps 3-6, to post your journals for the Vision IFRS/IAS OPS reporting currency ledger.


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Review Journal Entries and Account Balances (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will use inquiry windows to review journal entries and account balances for both the primary ledger and its reporting currency. From the reporting currency, you can drill down to the primary ledger.

Assumptions




Tasks

Use Account Inquiry

1. Navigate to the Account Inquiry window.

• (N) Inquiry > Account − Ledger Name = Vision Operations (USA) − From = Current period − To = Current period − Currency Type = Total

2. Place cursor in Accounts record.


Segment Low High

Company 01 01

Department 000 000

Account 1210 1210

Sub Account 21XX 21XX

Product 000 000

4. (B) OK

5. (B) Show Balances

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



− Verify PTD = 135000

6. (B) Journal Details

7. (B) Show Full Journal

8. Close the last two windows until you are back at the Account Inquiry page.

9. Change the ledger to the reporting currency IAS Reporting Vision Ops and keep the other query criteria the same.

10. (B) Show Balances − Verify PTD = 135000


12. (B) Drilldown

13. (I) Folder > Folder Tools > Show Field

14. Show the Ledger field. − Notice the ledger name displayed is the primary ledger, the origin of the journal.


Use Journal Inquiry

16. Navigate to the Journal Entry Inquiry window.

• (N) Inquiry > Journal

17. Locate your Meals journal. − Tip: Use a wildcard (e.g., %Meals%)

18. (B) Find

19. Verify batch statuses is Posted.

20. (B) Review Journal

21. (B) T Accounts (B) Options

22. Show in T Accounts − Account Description = Checked − Balances = Unchecked − Entered amounts = Unchecked − Activity = Checked

23. (B) T Accounts

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



24. (B) Activity Summary

25. (B) Options − Organize By = Segments − Choose Department and Account

26. (B) Activity Summary.


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Review Journal Entries and Account Balances (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will use inquiry windows to review journal entries and account balances for both the primary ledger and its reporting currency. From the reporting currency, you can drill down to the primary ledger.

Assumptions




Tasks

Use Account Inquiry


• (N) Inquiry > Account − Ledger Name = Vision Operations (USA) − From = Current period − To = Current period − Currency Type = Total


3. Enter the following in the Find Accounts window: Segment Low High

Company 01 01

Department 000 000

Account 1210 1210

Sub Account 21XX 21XX

Product 000 000 Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



4. (B) OK



7. (B) Show Full Journal

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



8. Close the last two windows until you are back at the Account Inquiry page.

9. Change the ledger to the reporting currency IAS Reporting Vision Ops. Keep the other query criteria the same.



12. (B) Drilldown

13. (I) Folder > Folder Tools > Show Field

14. Show the Ledger field. − Notice the ledger name displayed is the primary ledger, the origin of the journal.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




Use Journal Inquiry

16. Navigate to the Journal Entry Inquiry window.

• (N) Inquiry > Journal

17. Locate your Meals journal. − Tip: Use a wildcard (e.g.,%Meals%)

18. (B) Find

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



19. 19. Verify batch statuses is Posted (the first 3 lines are showing the journals posted to the secondary ledger, Vision IFRS/IAS Ops, associated with the Vision Operations (USA) primary ledger.)


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



21. (B) T Accounts (B) Options

22. Show in T Accounts. − Account Description = Checked − Balances = Unchecked − Entered amounts = Unchecked − Activity = Checked

23. (B) T Accounts

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



24. (B) Activity Summary

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



25. (B) Options − Organize By = Segments − Choose Department and Account

26. (B) Activity Summary.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Reverse a Journal Entry (Required)

Overview

Journals may be scheduled for reversal in another period. Users may enter the period in the Journal window or it may be set to default from the category. In this practice, you will reverse a journal entry.

There are four ways to create a reversing journal. − Manually − Use the Generate > Reversals window − Profile Option GL: Autolaunch Reversal after Period Open is set to Yes and a new

period is opened (category must support auto reverse) − Run the Program - Automatic Reversal concurrent process that creates a reversing

journal

Assumptions




Tasks

Reverse a Journal Manually

A memo from the MIS department states, "Please correct the charge for computers for the latest open period. The proper charge is 87000, not 85000."



2. Find the XXComputer Purchases and Sales Batch.

3. Select the line for 85000 and review the Journal.

4. Reverse the 85000 journal entry.

5. Select the Current period.

6. Confirm reversing request completes prior to continuing. Hint: (M) View > Requests.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Post the Reversing Entry



8. Find the reversed batch.

9. Select the reversing journal entry for posting.

10. Post.

Enter the Correct Journal



12. Create a new Batch. − Batch = XXCorrected Computer Purchases

13. (B) Journals. − Journal = XXCorrected Purchases − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Addition − Period = Current period − Currency = Defaults




20 01-000-1110-21XX-000 5000 Cash


15. (I) Save

16. (B) Post O

racl

e U

nive

rsity

and

New

Hor

izon

s C

ompu

ter L

earn

ing

Cen

ters

- Ab

u D

habi

use

onl

y

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Reverse a Journal Entry (Required)

Overview

Journals may be scheduled for reversal in another period. Users may enter the period in the Journal window or it may be set to default from the category. In this practice, you will reverse a journal entry.

There are four ways to create a reversing journal. − Manually − Use the Generate > Reversals window − Profile Option GL: Autolaunch Reversal after Period Open is set to Yes and a new

period is opened (category must support auto reverse) − Run the Program - Automatic Reversal concurrent process that creates a reversing

journal

Assumptions




Tasks

Reverse a Journal Manually

A memo from the MIS department states, "Please correct the charge for computers for the latest open period. The proper charge is 87000, not 85000."


• (N) Journals > Enter − Batch = XXComputer Purchases and Sales (Tip: use wildcard. Ex: XXCom%)

2. (B) Find

3. Select the line for 85000.


• (B) Reverse

• Select the Current period and click the OK button.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



5. (B) OK to acknowledge the concurrent request ID note.

6. (M) View > Requests and monitor your request until it completes.


Post the Reversing Entry


• (N) Journals > Post − Batch = Rev%XX%

9. (B) Find

10. Select the reversing journal entry for posting.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



11. (B) Post

12. Click (B) OK to acknowledge the concurrent request ID note.


Enter the Correct Journal

14. Navigate to the Enter Journals window


15. (B) New Batch − Batch = XXCorrected Computer Purchases

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



16. (B) Journals − Journal = XXCorrected Purchases − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Addition − Period = Current period − Currency = Defaults




20 01-000-1110-21XX-000 5000 Cash


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



18. (I) Save

19. (B) Post

20. (B) OK to acknowledge concurrent request ID note.


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Schedule a Journal to Reverse then Generate the Reversal (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will schedule a journal to reverse and then generate the reversal.

Assumptions




Tasks

Set the Reversal Period

1. Navigate to the Enter Journals window and find your XXMeals Expense Journal Entry.


2. Select the line for 200


4. Select the next, non-adjusting period for reversal.

5. Save

Note: In R12, you can only generate reversals for posted journals. This helps to ensure data integrity.

Generate the Reversal

6. Navigate to the Reverse Journals window and find your batch.

• (N) Journals > Generate > Reversal

7. Select the batch name to be reversed.

8. (B) Reverse

Find your Reversal

9. Navigate to the Enter Journals window, find and review your reversal.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Schedule a Journal to Reverse then Generate the Reversal (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will schedule a journal to reverse and then generate the reversal.

Assumptions




Tasks

Set the Reversal Period

1. Navigate to the Enter Journals window and find your XXMeals Expense Journal Entry.

• (N) Journals > Enter − Batch: XXMeals Expense (Tip: use wildcard. Ex: XXMeals%)

2. (B) Find

3. Select the line for 200.


5. Reverse Area − Period = Choose the next, non-adjusting period − Method = Switch Dr/Cr

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



6. Save.

Note: In R12, you can only generate reversals for posted journals. This helps to ensure data integrity.


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Generate the Reversal

8. Navigate to the Reverse Journals window.

• (N) Journals > Generate > Reversal

9. Locate your batch. (Tip: use wildcard. Ex: XXMeals%).

10. (B) Find

11. Click the check box next to the batch name to be reversed.

12. (B) Reverse

13. (B) OK to acknowledge your concurrent request has been submitted.


Find your Reversal

15. Navigate to the Enter Journals window and find your reversal.

• (N) Journals > Enter − Batch = Rev%XXMeals%

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Set up Automatic Journal Reversal (Required)

Overview

If you routinely generate and post a large number of reversing entries as part of your month-end close or opening procedures, you can save time and reduce errors by setting up Automatic Journal Reversal. The Journal Reversal Criteria window is used to define reversal criteria based on journal categories. However, your reversal criteria will only apply to new journal entries that use that category; it will not apply retroactively to existing journals using that category. In this practice, you will set up an automatic journal reversal.

Assumptions




Tasks

Verify your Journal Category exists (Instructor to Demonstrate how to setup Autoreverse)

1. Navigate to the Categories window and verify that your XXAccrual category exists. If the category does not exist, just add it.

• (N) Setup > Journal > Categories>

Specify Journal Reversal Criteria

2. Navigate to the Journal Reversal Criteria window.

• (N) Setup > Journal > Autoreverse − Criteria Set = XXReversal Criteria − Description = XXReversal Criteria − Note that there is automatically a journal reversal criteria record for each journal

category. − Enter a Query (F11) − Category = XXAccrual − Execute your Query (Ctl-F11) − Reversal Period = Next Non-Adjusting − Method = Switch Dr/Cr − AutoReverse = Checked − AutoPost Reversal = Checked

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



3. Save.

Note: The GL: Launch Autoreverse after Period Open profile option will determine if the Posting process will be submitted automatically when the status of the period changes to Open after the Open Period process is run.

4. Assign the Journal Reversal Criteria Set to your accounting setup.

• N) Setup > Financials > Accounting Setup Manager > Accounting Setups − Search by Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − (B) Go − (I) Update Accounting Options − (I) Update = Setup Step Vision Operations (USA) − (B) Next − Journal Reversal Criteria Set = XXReversal Criteria − (B) Finish − Close page

Test Journal Reversal (Students will start the practice with this step)



6. (B) New Journal − Journal = XXSalary Accrual − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = XXAccrual (Instructor will tell you the category to use) − Period = Current period − Note the Reversal Period defaults into the reverse area



10 01-410-5800-21XX-000

30000 Salary Expense (410)

20 01-420-5800-21XX-000


30 01-430-5800-21XX-000


40 01-000-2225-21XX-000

60000 Accrued Salaries

8. Save.

9. (B) Post

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



10. Ensure the concurrent request completes successfully.


Run the Automatic Reversal Process (Instructor will demonstrate this step)

12. Navigate to the Standard Request Submission window.


13. Click (B) OK to submit a single request. − Name = Program - Automatic Reversal − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Period = ALL

14. Submit the request and review the output.

Review Journal Reversal (Students will start the practice with this step)

15. Verify your reversing journal was created.


• Journal Name = Rev%XX%Sal%

• (B) Find

16. Return to Navigator.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Set up Automatic Journal Reversal (Required)

Overview

If you routinely generate and post a large number of reversing entries as part of your month-end close or opening procedures, you can save time and reduce errors by setting up Automatic Journal Reversal. The Journal Reversal Criteria window is used to define reversal criteria based on journal categories. However, your reversal criteria will only apply to new journal entries that use that category; it will not apply retroactively to existing journals using that category. In this practice, you will set up an automatic journal reversal.

Assumptions




Tasks

Verify your Journal Category exists (Instructor to Demonstrate how to setup Autoreverse)

1. Navigate to the Categories window and verify that your category exists.

Note: If the category does not exist add it at this time.

• (N) Setup > Journal > Categories> − Enter a Query (F11) − Category = XXAccrual

2. Execute your Query (Ctl-F11).


Specify Journal Reversal Criteria

4. Navigate to the Journal Reversal Criteria window.

• (N) Setup > Journal > Autoreverse − Criteria Set = XXReversal Criteria − Description = XXReversal Criteria − (B) Yes – Save is automatically invoked when moving to the category region

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Note: there is automatically a journal reversal criteria record for each journal category.

− Enter a Query (F11) − Category = XXAccrual − Execute your Query (Ctl-F11) − Reversal Period = Next Non-Adjusting − Method = Switch Dr/Cr − AutoReverse = Checked − AutoPost Reversal = Checked

5. Save.


Note: The “GL: Launch Autoreverse after Period Open” profile option will determine if the Posting process will be submitted automatically when the status of the period changes to Open after the Open Period process is run.

7. Assign the Journal Reversal Criteria Set to your accounting setup.

• N) Setup > Financials > Accounting Setup Manager > Accounting Setups − Search by Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − (B) Go − (I) Update Accounting Options − (I) Update = Setup Step Vision Operations (USA) − (B) Next

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



− Journal Reversal Criteria Set = XXReversal Criteria

− (B) Finish − Close page

Test Journal Reversal (Students will start the practice at this step)



9. (B) New Journal − Journal = XXSalary Accrual − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = XXAccrual (Instructor will tell which category to use) − Period = Current period − Note the Reversal Period defaults into the reverse area



10 01-410-5800-0000-000 30000 Salary Expense (410)

20 01-420-5800-0000-000 20000 Salary Expense (420)

30 01-430-5800-0000-000 10000 Salary Expense (430)

40 01-000-2225-0000-000 60000 Accrued Salaries

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



11. Save.

12. (B) Post

• (B) OK to acknowledge concurrent request ID note.

13. Ensure the concurrent request completes successfully. Hint: (M) View > Requests


Run the Automatic Reversal Process (Instructor will demonstrate this step)



16. Click (B) OK to submit a single request. − Name = Program - Automatic Reversal − Ledger =Vision Operations (USA) − Period = ALL

• Click (OK) to acknowledge parameter selection.

• Click (B) Submit to submit the request.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



• Click (B) No to close request submission window.

17. Locate your concurrent request and View Output. Hint: (M) View > Requests.

Review Journal Reversal (Students will start the practice with this step)

18. Verify your reversing journal was created.


• Journal Name = Rev%XX%Sal%

• (B) Find

19. Return to Navigator.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Set up Suspense Accounts (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will set up suspense accounts.

Assumptions




Tasks

1. Define a Suspense Account.

• Enter the following:

Ledger Source Category Account

Vision Operations (USA)

Manual XXAccrual 01-000-2990-21XX-000

2. Enter an Unbalanced Journal.

• (B) New Journal − Journal = XXMisc Accruals − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = XXAccrual − Period = Current period



10 01-410-4130-21XX-000 500 Commission

20 01-000-2215-21XX-000 450 Accruals

• Click (B) Yes in Decision window.

3. Post the Journal.

4. Navigate to the Enter Journals window to review results of posting.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Set up Suspense Accounts (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will set up suspense accounts.

Assumptions



• Responsibility = General Ledger, Visio Operations (USA)

Tasks

1. Navigate to the Categories window and verify that your category exists.

Note: If the category does not exist add it at this time.

• (N) Setup > Journal > Categories> − Enter a Query (F11) − Category = XXAccrual

2. Execute your Query (Ctl-F11).


Define a Suspense Account

1. Navigate to the Suspense Account window.

• (N) Setup > Accounts > Suspense


Ledger Source Category Account

Vision Operations (USA)

Manual XXAccrual (Instructor will tell you what to use)

01-000-2990-21XX-000 O

racl

e U

nive

rsity

and

New

Hor

izon

s C

ompu

ter L

earn

ing

Cen

ters

- Ab

u D

habi

use

onl

y

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



3. Save.


Enter an Unbalanced Journal



6. (B) New Journal − Journal = XXMisc Accruals − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = XXAccrual (Instructor will tell you what to use) − Period = Current period



10 01-410-4130-21XX-000 500 Commission

20 01-000-2215-21XX-000 450 Accruals

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



8. Save.

9. Click (B) Yes in Decision window.

10. Click (B) Post to post the Journal.

11. Ensure the request completes successfully. Hint: (M) Requests > View.

View the Journal

12. Query the XXMisc Accruals Journal. − F11 − Journal = XXMisc% − Ctrl+F11

13. Review the Journal.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Create a STAT Journal (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will create a STAT journal.

Assumptions




Tasks

1. Create a Single Journal.

• (B) New Journal − Journal Name = XXHeadcount − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Headcount − Period = Current period − Currency = STAT

• Enter the following journal:


10 01-410-9110-21XX-000 100 Dept 410 Headcount



Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Create a STAT Journal (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will create a STAT journal.

Assumptions




Tasks




2. (B) New Journal − Journal Name = XXHeadcount − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Headcount − Period = Current period − Currency = STAT







Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



4. (B) Post


6. Click (B) OK to acknowledge concurrent request ID note.

7. Query your Journal Name but place “%” before and after your Journal Name, such as %XXHeadcount%. Notice 2 journals have been created and posted; one for the primary ledger and another for its reporting currency. The name of the reporting currency journal is the same as the primary ledger except the reporting currency name is prefixed.


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define Statistical Units of Measure (Optional)

Overview

In this practice, you will define statistical units of measure.

Assumptions




Tasks

1. Define Statistical Units of Measure


Account Unit of Measure Description

7640 XXFlights Flights

Note: The "Unit of Measure" field allows you to "free form" the information or choose an existing value from the underlying list of values.

2. Verify Profile Option (Instructor will perform this step)

• Find the Journals: Mix Statistical and Monetary and set the User value to Yes

3. Enter a Mixed Statistical and Monetary Journal.

• (B) New Journal − Journal = XXAirfare Expense


Line Account Debit Credit Unit of Measure

Quantity

10 01-410-7640-21XX-000 3000 XXFlights 2

20 01-420-7640-21XX-000 4000 XXFlights 5

30 01-430-7640-21XX-000 5000 XXFlights 1

40 01-000-1110-21XX-000 12000

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Use Account Analysis and Drilldown

4. Navigate to the Account Analysis and Drilldown page.

• (N) Inquiry > Account Analysis and Drilldown

5. Inquiry Type = Period Listing

6. Search − Ledger/Ledger Set = Vision Operations (USA) − Period From = Current Period − Period To = Current Period − Account From = 01-410-7640-21XX-000 (B) Search (B) Select − Account To = 01-430-7640-21XX-000 (B) Search (B) Select

7. (B) Go

8. Click on PTD balance for account 01-420-7640-21XX-000. Review journal information.

9. (B) Create View − View Name = XXStat View − Number of Rows Displayed = 10 Rows − Description = Display Stat Amount − Columns Shown = Stat Amount (I) Move

10. (B) Apply and View Results.

11. Review Stat Amount.

12. Close page.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Define Statistical Units of Measure (Optional)

Overview

In this practice, you will define statistical units of measure.

Assumptions




Tasks

Define Statistical Units of Measure

1. Navigate to the Units window.

• (N) Setup > Accounts > Units


Account Unit of Measure Description

7640 XXFlights Flights

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



3. Save.

Verify Profile Option (Instructor will demonstrate this step)



5. Find the Journals: Mix Statistical and Monetary and set the User value to Yes.

6. Save.


Enter a Mixed Statistical and Monetary Journal

8. Open the Enter Journals window.


9. (B) New Journal − Journal = XXAirfare Expense


Line Account Debit Credit Unit of Measure

Quantity

10 01-410-7640-21XX-000 3000 XXFlights 2

20 01-420-7640-21XX-000 4000 XXFlights 5

30 01-430-7640-21XX-000 5000 XXFlights 1

40 01-000-1110-21XX-000 12000

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



11. Save.

12. (B) Post







17. Search − Ledger/Ledger Set = Vision Operations (USA) − Period From = Current Period − Period To = Current Period − Account From = 01-410-7640-21XX-000 (B) Search (B) Select − Account To = 01-430-7640-21XX-000 (B) Search (B) Select

18. (B) Go

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



19. Click on PTD balance for account 01-420-7640-21XX-000. Review journal information.

20. (B) Create View − View Name = XXStat View

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



− Number of Rows Displayed = 10 Rows − Description = Display Stat Amount − Columns Shown = Stat Amount (I) Move

21. (B) Apply and View Results. Review Stat Amount.

22. (L) Close window. Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Load a Basic Journal Using WEB ADI (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will load a journal using Web ADI.

Assumptions


• You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice. ADI must also be installed.

Tasks

Responsibility: Oracle Web ADI (Instructor to Demonstrate Layout Modification)

Note: May need to add the responsibility to the user Operations.

1. (N) Define Layout

2. Select General Ledger – Journals.

3. (B) Go

4. Select Functional Actuals – Single.

5. (B) Update

6. (B) Next

Displayed are the following: − Header − Context − Line

7. Select the Field to be displayed either in the Header or Line section of the Journal Entry.

8. Select the following Optional fields: − Group ID − Journal Description

• Placement is Header 1 for both.

Line Description is already selected.

Scroll down and select (B) Apply.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Launch the Journal Wizard (Students will start the Practice)


10. Navigate to the Journal Wizard.

• (N) Journals > Launch Journal Wizard

11. From the Document Parameters select the following − Layout- Functional Actual – Single − Content- Accept Default (None)

12. (B) Create Document

13. (B) Open

14. (B) Enable Macros

Processing Document appears as it builds the Excel spreadsheet.

15. Upon completion of the build click (B) Close.

16. Fill in the Header Information.

17. Enter the following Line information:

Account Debit Credit

01-000-1110-21XX-000 25000

01-000-1210-21XX-000 25000

18. (M) Oracle > Upload

• Following options should be selected: − Flagged Rows − Automatically Submit Journal Import − Import with Validation

19. (B) Upload

20. Record you Concurrent Request or Group ID Number.

21. Select the (H) Close Window from the Journal Wizard.

22. N > Journals > Post

23. Enter the following in the Find window: − Current Period − Batch- Use the %Group ID% (or you can use the Concurrent Request ID)

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



24. (B) Find

25. Check the box on the left side of the Journal.

26. (B) Post

27. (B) OK

28. (M) View > Request

Verify the Posting Process completed.

29. Close Window.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Load a Basic Journal Using WEB ADI (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will load a journal using Web ADI.

Assumptions


• You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice. ADI must also be installed.

Tasks

Responsibility: Oracle Web ADI (Instructor to Demonstrate Layout Modification)

Note: May need to add the responsibility to the user "Operations".

1. (N) Define Layout

2. Select General Ledger – Journals.

3. (B) Go

4. Select Functional Actuals – Single.

5. (B) Update

6. (B) Next

7. Select the Field to be displayed either in the Header or Line section of the Journal Entry.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



8. Check the following Optional fields and set Placement to Header 1: − Group ID − Journal Description

Note: Line Description is already selected.

• Scroll down and select (B) Apply.

Launch the Journal Wizard (Students will start the Practice)


10. Navigate to the Journal Wizard

• (N) Journals > Launch Journal Wizard

11. From the Document Parameters select the following − Layout- Functional Actual – Single − Content- Accept Default (None)

12. (B) Create Document

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



13. (B) Open

14. (B) Enable Macros

Processing Document appears as it builds the Excel spreadsheet

15. Upon completion of the build (B) Close

16. Fill in the Header Information: − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Addition − Source = Spreadsheet − Currency = USD − Group= leave it blank (system will provide number) − Journal = XX CAsh

17. Enter the following Line information:

Account Debit Credit

01-000-1110-2101-000 25000

01-000-1210-2101-000 25000

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



18. (M) Oracle > Upload

• Following options should be selected: − Flagged Rows − Automatically Submit Journal Import − Import with Validation

19. (B) Upload

20. Record your Group ID Number.

21. Close Excel spreadsheet.

22. Select the (H) Close Window from the Journal Wizard.

23. (N) Journals > Post

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



24. Enter the following in the Find window: − Current Period − Batch- Use the %Group ID%

25. (B) Find

26. Check the box on the left side of the Journal.

27. (B) Post

28. Click (B) OK to acknowledge concurrent request ID.


Verify the Posting Process completed.

30. Close Window.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Summary Accounts

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define Summary Accounts (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will define Summary Accounts.

Assumptions




Tasks

Instructor to Demonstrate the Steps to Create a Summary Template

1. Review Rollup Groups. − Application = General Ledger − Title = Accounting Flexfield − Structure = Operations Accounting Flex − (B) Find

• Review the following for Account Segment: − Code = Expenses − Name = Expenses − Description = Rollup Group for Total Expenses (Assigned to Total Cost of Sales

(5000), Employee (6000) and Operating (7000) accounts) Rollup Group for Total Expenses

2. Review the Rollup Group attachment to Parent Values.

• Find the Operations Accounting Flex your Chart of Accounts Structure and the Account Segment value 5000. May want to repeat the step for accounts 6000 and 7000.

3. Freeze Rollup Groups.

• Find the Operations Accounting Flex Chart of Accounts Structure in the Key Flexfield Segments window.

• Check the Freeze Rollup Groups checkbox and compile the flexfield.

4. Define the Summary Template.


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



− Name = XXExpenses − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Template = T-D-Expenses-D-T − Description = Summary Account for Expenses − Earliest Period = Current Period

Students to Continue with the Practice

5. Create journal entry:

• (N) Journals > Entry

• (B) New Journal

• Enter the following for the journal header: − Journal = XXSummary − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Adjustment − Period = Current Period − Currency = USD

• Enter the following for the journal lines:


10 01-410-7640-21XX-000 500

20 01-420-7640-21XX-000 450

30 01-430-7640-21XX-000 65

40 01-000-1110-21XX-000 1015

• (B) Post the journal.

Review the Summary Account in the Account Inquiry area. − From = Current period − To = Current period

• Place cursor in the Summary Template field.

• Select the Summary Template "XXExpenses" from the List of Values and tab to the next field.

• Restrict the range of accounts to be retrieve by entering 21XX for the Low and High values in the SubAccount field.

6. Use Account Analysis and Drilldown.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



• Inquiry Type = Period Listing

• Search − Ledger/Ledger Set = Vision Operations (USA) − Period From = Current Period − Period To = Current Period − Account From = T-410-7000-21XX-T (B) Search (B) Select − Account To = T-430-7000-21XX-T (B) Search (B) Select − Display Summary Accounts = Yes − Summary Template = XX Summary

• Click on the PTD balance of account 01-410-7640-21XX-000 to review journal line information.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Define Summary Accounts (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will define Summary Accounts.

Assumptions




Tasks

Instructor to Demonstrate the Steps to Create a Summary Template

Review Rollup Groups

1. Navigate to the Groups window.

• (N) Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Key > Groups − Application = General Ledger − Title = Accounting Flexfield − Structure = Operations Accounting Flex − Segment = Account − (B) Find

2. Review the following: − Code = Expenses − Name = Expenses − Description = Rollup Group for Total Expenses (Assigned to Total Cost of Sales

(5000), Employee (6000) and Operating (7000) accounts) Rollup Group for Total Expenses

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Attach to Parent Values

3. Navigate to the Key Values window.

• (N) Setup > Financials > Flexfields > Key > Values

4. Review the Rollup Group attachment to Parent Values.

• Find the Operations Accounting Flex your Chart of Accounts Structure and the Account Segment value 5000. May want to repeat the step for accounts 6000 and 7000.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Freeze Rollup Groups

5. Navigate to the Key Flexfield Segment window.


6. Find the Operations Accounting Flex.

7. Check the Freeze Rollup Groups checkbox.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



8. (B) Compile

Define the Summary Template

9. Navigate to the Summary Accounts window.

• (N) Setup > Accounts > Summary


• Enter the following: − Name = XXExpenses − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Template = T-D-Expenses-D-T − Description = Summary Account for Expenses − Earliest Period = Current Period

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



11. (I) Save

12. Click (B) OK to acknowledge concurrent request submission note. − Verify the process completes

Students to Continue with the Practice

Create Journal Entry (Students will start the lab with this step)

Note: This journal is only required, PROVIDED that the lab for statistical units of measure was not created during the chapter of basic journal entries.

13. Create a journal entry:

• (N) Journals > Entry

• (B) New Journal

• Enter the following for the journal header: − Journal = XXSummary − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Adjustment − Period = Current Period − Currency = USD

• Enter the following for the journal lines:


10 01-410-7640-21XX-000 500

20 01-420-7640-21XX-000 450

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




30 01-430-7640-21XX-000 65

40 01-000-1110-21XX-000 1015

• (B) Post

• Close all windows and return to the Navigator.

Review the Summary Account


• (N) Inquiry > Account − From = Current period − To = Current period

15. Place cursor in the Summary Template field.

• Select the XXExpenses Summary Template from the List of Values and tab to the next field.

• Restrict the range of accounts for your Summary Template; in the Subaccount field type 21XX as the Low/High Value.

• Select OK.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



16. Review the accounts that have been produced - (B) Show Balances.

17. Review the Detail Balances - (B) Detail Balances.

18. Review the Journal Details - (B) Journal Details.

Note: If budgets are being used, you can also view variances at a summary level through this form.





21. Search − Ledger/Ledger Set = Vision Operations (USA) − Period From = Current Period − Period To = Current Period − Account From = T-410-7000-21XX-T (B) Search (B) Select − Account To = T-430-7000-21XX-T (B) Search (B) Select − Display Summary Accounts = Yes − Summary Template = XX Summary

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



The (B) Search and the (B) Select are only needed if the flashlight is used to find the account values. Remember that the account values in Drilldown and Analysis must exist in the system.

22. (B) Go.

23. Click on account T-410-7000-21XX-T to view detail accounts balances.

24. Click on the PTD balance of account 01-410-7640-21XX-000 to review journal line information.

25. (L) Close Window.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Guided Demonstration - Maintain Summary Templates Program

Responsibility: General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)

(N) Other > Requests > (B) Submit a New Request

1. Open the Submit Request window.

2. Select Single Request.

3. (B) OK

4. In the Name field, enter or select the Program - Maintain Summary Templates program.

5. Click (B) OK to accept the default parameter of your primary ledger.

6. (B) Submit

7. Note your Request ID in the Decision window that appears.

8. (B) No.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Advanced Journal Entries

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Create Recurring Journals (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will define and generate recurring journals.

Assumptions




Tasks

1. Create a Skeleton Recurring Journal Batch.

• (N) Journals > Define > Recurring − Batch = XX Skeleton Recurring Journal − Batch Type = Single Ledger − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Journal = XXSalary Expense − Category = Payroll − Currency = USD

• Enter lines according to the following table:

Line Account Description

10 01-120-5800-21XX-000 Salaries expense



40 01-000-2410-21XX-000 Accrued payroll

2. Generate the journal for the current period.

• Choose the current period and submit your recurring journal (B) Submit.

• Once the process has completed find your unposted skeleton journal.

• Navigate to the Journal Entry window.

• (N) Journals > Enter − Batch Name = XX Skeleton Recurring Journals

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




Line Account Description Debit Credit

10 01-120-5800-21XX-000 Salaries expense 200000



40 01-000-2410-21XX-000 Accrued payroll 400000

3. Create a Standard Recurring Journal Batch.

• (N) Journals > Define > Recurring − Batch = XX Standard Recurring Journal − Batch Type = Single Ledger − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Journal = XXAnnual Support Contracts − Category = Revenue − Currency = USD

• Enter a journal according to the following table:

Line Account Description Step Operator Amt

10 01-480-4120-21XX-000 Contracts - S&M 1 Enter -10000

20 01-230-4120-21XX-000 Contracts - European Sales 1 Enter -20000

30 01-210-4120-21XX-000 Contracts - American Sales 1 Enter -30000

40 01-000-1210-21XX-000 A/R 1 Enter 60000

4. Verify the process completes.

5. Once the process has completed find your unposted standard journal.

• (N) Journals > Enter − Batch Name = XX Standard Recurring Journals

6. Create a Formula Recurring Journal Batch.

The Sales teams are paid a basic salary plus a monthly commission of 5% of sales for their department.

• (N) Journals > Define > Recurring − Batch = XX Formula Recurring Journal − Batch Type = Single Ledger − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Journal = XX Salesperson Bonus Accrual − Category = Accrual

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



− Currency = Your functional currency

• Enter a journal line according to the following table:


10 01-480-6155-21XX-000 Bonus – S&M Department

• Enter the following formula for the journal line:

Step Operator Amount Account Balance Type

Amount Type

Period

1 Enter 01-480-4120-21XX-000

Actual PTD Current Period

2 X -0.05 N/A N/A N/A

• Save your work and enter the second and third lines for the other 2 departments adding an extra 1000 to the Department 350 bonus and deducting 500 from the Department 375 bonus.


20 01-230-6155-21XX-000 Bonus – European Sales


Amount Type

Period

1 Enter 01-230-4120-21XX-000


2 X -0.05 N/A N/A N/A

3 + 1000 N/A N/A N/A


30 01-210-6155-21XX-000 Bonus – American Sales


Amount Type

Period

1 Enter 01-210-4120-21XX-000


2 X -0.05 N/A N/A N/A

3 - 500 N/A N/A N/A

• Enter a final line:


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



9999 01-000-2440-21XX-000

Bonus – Accrual Sales Teams

7. Generate the journal for the current period.

8. Verify the Process Completes.

9. Find your unposted journal.

• (N) Journals > Enter − Batch Name = XX Formula Recurring Journals

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Create Recurring Journals (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will define and generate recurring journals.

Assumptions




Tasks

Create a Skeleton Recurring Journal Batch

1. Navigate to the Recurring Journals definition window

• (N) Journals > Define > Recurring − Batch = XX Skeleton Recurring Journal − Batch Type = Single Ledger − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Journal = XXSalary Expense − Category = Payroll − Currency = USD

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



2. (B) Lines

3. Enter lines according to the following table (for lines 10 to 30,after each line go to (M) File Save and Proceed):





40 01-000-2410-21XX-000 Accrued payroll

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



4. Save.

5. Close window to return to the Batch Header.

Generate the journal for the current period

6. (B) Generate

7. (B) Submit

8. Choose the current period and submit your recurring journal.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



9. (B) Submit


Verify the Process Completes


• (B) Find

12. Once the process has completed find your unposted skeleton journal.

13. Navigate to the Journal Entry window.

• (N) Journals > Enter − Batch Name = XX Skeleton Recurring Journals

14. (B) Find



Line Account Description Debit Credit



Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




40 01-000-2410-21XX-000 Accrued payroll 400000

17. Save and post your Journal.

Create a Standard Recurring Journal Batch

18. Navigate to the Recurring Journals definition window.

• (N) Journals > Define > Recurring − Batch = XX Standard Recurring Journal − Batch Type = Single Ledger − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Journal = XXAnnual Support Contracts − Category = Revenue − Currency = USD

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



19. (B) Lines

20. Enter a journal according to the following table: (for lines 10 to 30,after each line go to (M) File Save and Proceed):

Line Account Description Step Operator Amt

10 01-480-4120-21XX-000 Contracts - S&M 1 Enter -10000

20 01-230-4120-21XX-000 Contracts - European Sales 1 Enter -20000

30 01-210-4120-21XX-000 Contracts - American Sales 1 Enter -30000

40 01-000-1210-21XX-000 A/R 1 Enter 60000

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



21. Save.

22. Close window to return to the Batch Header.

23. Generate the journal for the current period (B) Generate.

24. (B) Submit

25. Choose the current period and submit your recurring journal.

• (B) Submit

• (B) OK to acknowledge concurrent request ID note



27. (B) Find

Once the process has completed find your unposted standard journal


• (N) Journals > Enter − Batch Name = XX Standard Recurring Journals

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



29. (B) Find


31. (B) Post

Create a Formula Recurring Journal Batch

The Sales teams are paid a basic salary plus a monthly commission of 5% of sales for their department.

32. Navigate to the Recurring Journals definition window to define the formula journal.

• (N) Journals > Define > Recurring − Batch = XX Formula Recurring Journal − Batch Type = Single Ledger − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Journal = XX Salesperson Bonus Accrual − Category = Accrual − Currency = USD

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



33. (B) Lines

34. Enter a journal line according to the following table:


10 01-480-6155-21XX-000 Bonus – S&M Department

35. Enter the following formula for the journal line:


Amount Type

Period

1 Enter 01-480-4120-21XX-000


2 X -0.05 N/A N/A N/A O

racl

e U

nive

rsity

and

New

Hor

izon

s C

ompu

ter L

earn

ing

Cen

ters

- Ab

u D

habi

use

onl

y

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



36. Save your work and enter the second and third lines for the other 2 departments adding an extra 1000 to the Department 350 bonus and deducting 500 from the Department 375 bonus.


20 01-230-6155-21XX-000 Bonus – European Sales


Amount Type

Period

1 Enter 01-230-4120-21XX-000


2 X -.05 N/A N/A N/A

3 + 1000 N/A N/A N/A

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




30 01-210-6155-21XX-000 Bonus – American Sales


Amount Type

Period

1 Enter 01-210-4120-21XX-000


2 X -.05 N/A N/A N/A

3 - 500 N/A N/A N/A

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



37. Enter a final line:


9999 01-000-2410-21XX-000 Bonus – Accrual Sales Teams

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



38. Save your work.

39. Close the window.

Generate the journal for the current period

40. Generate the journal for the current period (B) Generate.

41. (B) Submit

42. Choose the current period and submit your recurring journal by clicking (B) Submit.



44. (B) Find

45. Monitor the process until it completes.

Find your unposted journal

46. Navigate to the Journal Entry window

• (N) Journals > Enter − Batch Name = XX Formula Recurring Journals

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



47. (B) Find

48. (B) Post

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Create a Mass Allocation Journal (Required)

Overview

A mass allocation cannot run against a zero balance cost pool. In this practice, you will create a journal entry to ensure that there is a balance in the cost pool. Then, you will define a MassAllocation to allocate the cost pool.

Assumptions



• You have completed the Recurring Journal Entry practice.


Tasks

1. Create a Single Journal.

• Open the Enter Journals window.


• (B) New Journal − Journal Name = XXBenefits Cost Pool − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Allocation − Period = Current period − Currency = USD

• Enter the following journal:


10 01-404-6140-21XX-000 155,000 Benefit Cost Pool

20 01-000-2410-21XX-000 155,000

2. Define MassAllocation.

• Define a MassAllocation. − Batch = XX MassAllocation − Balance Type = Actual

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



− Description = XX MassAllocation − (B) Formula − Name = XXAllocate Insurance Benefits − Description = XXAllocate Insurance Benefit − Category = Allocation − Currency = USD − Full Cost Pool Allocation needs to be checked

Line Amount Account Currency Type

Amount Type

Relative Period

Balance Type

A N/A (Vision Operations (USD)). 01-404-6140-

21XX-000

C.C.C.C.C.C

Total PTD Current Period

Actual

B N/A (Vision Operations (USD)). 01-100-5800-

21XX-000

C.C.L.C.C.C


Actual

C N/A (Vision Operations (USD)). 01-100-5800-

21XX-000

C.C.S.C.C.C


Actual

T N/A (Vision Operations (USD)). 01-100-5800-

21XX-000

C.C.L.C.C.C

N/A N/A

N/A N/A

O N/A (Vision Operations (USD)). 01-404-6140-

21XX-000

C.C.C.C.C.C

N/A N/A N/A N/A

3. Generate MassAllocation. − Name = XX MassAllocation − Ledger = Vision Operations (USD) − Balancing Segment Value = 01 − Period = Current Period − Allocation Method = Full

4. Verify the Process Completes.

5. Once the process has completed find your unposted standard journal.

• (N) Journals > Enter − Batch Name = %XX MassAllocation%

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Create a Mass Allocation Journal (Required)

Overview

A mass allocation cannot run against a zero balance cost pool. In this practice, you will create a journal entry to ensure that there is a balance in the cost pool. Then, you will define a MassAllocation to allocate the cost pool.

Assumptions



• You have completed the Recurring Journal Entry practice.


Tasks


1. Open the Enter Journals window.


2. (B) New Journal − Journal Name = XXCost Pool − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Allocation − Period = Current period − Currency = USD




10 01-404-6140-21XX-000 155,000 Benefit Cost Pool

20 01-000-2410-21XX-000 155,000

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



4. (I) Save



Define MassAllocation

7. Navigate to the Define MassAllocations window.

• (N) Journals > Define > Allocation

8. Define a MassAllocation − Batch = XX MassAllocation − Balance Type = Actual − Description = XX MassAllocation − (B) Formula − Name = XXAllocate Insurance Benefits − Description = XXAllocate Insurance Benefit − Category = Allocation − Currency = USD − Full Cost Pool Allocation needs to be checked

Line Amount Account Currency Type

Amount Type

Relative Period

Balance Type

A N/A (Vision Operations Total PTD Current Actual

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



(USD)). 01-404-6140-21XX-000

C.C.C.C.C.C

Period

B N/A (Vision Operations (USD)). 01-100-5800-

21XX-000

C.C.L.C.C.C


Actual

C N/A (Vision Operations (USD)). 01-100-5800-

21XX-000

C.C.S.C.C.C


Actual

T N/A (Vision Operations (USD)). 01-100-5800-

21XX-000

C.C.L.C.C.C

N/A N/A

N/A N/A

O N/A (Vision Operations (USD)). 01-404-6140-

21XX-000

C.C.C.C.C.C

N/A N/A N/A N/A

9. Save.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



10. Close window to return to batch header.

Generate MassAllocation

11. (B) Generate

12. (B) Submit

13. Enter the following information: − Name = XX MassAllocation − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Balancing Segment Value = 01 − Period = Current Period − Allocation Method = Full

14. (B) Submit




17. (B) Find

Once the process has completed find your unposted standard journal



Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



− Batch Name = %XX MassAllocation%

19. (B) Find



22. Close all windows to return to the navigator.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Journal Line Reconciliation

Overview

In this practice you will cross-reference journal entry lines for suspense account in General Ledger to reconcile the lines and ensure that the balance in suspense accounts are cleared in a timely manner.


Enable Reconciliation (Instructor to Demonstrate)

1. Enable reconciliation for suspense account 2990 for your accounting flexfield.

2. Navigate to Accounting Setup Manager and enable reconciliation for General Ledger, Vision Operations.

3. Generate the Program Inheritance Segment Value Attributes.

Enter Reconciliation Reference (Students will start the practice at this point)

4. You received a cash payment of $10,000, but you are unsure of the reason for the cash payment. For the time being, you post the balance to suspense account and enter a reconciliation reference to ensure that the balance will be cleared from the suspense account appropriately.

5. Enter journals to debit $10,000 to account 01-000-1110-21XX-000 and credit $10,000 to 01-000-2990-21XX-000 for the current month.

6. Enter reconciliation reference SUSP on journal line for 01-000-2990-21XX-000.


8. Afterwards you did a little research and found out that the payment was a mistake so you reverse the journal to debit the amount from suspense account and credit the cash back on the same period.

9. Ensure that you enter the same reconciliation reference to the journal lines that debit the suspense accounts before posting so you can reconcile them.

10. Post the reversing journal.

Manually Reconcile the Journals

11. Search for the journal lines with reconciliation reference SUSP for the current month to be reconciled.

12. Reconcile the lines.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution – Journal Line Reconciliation


Enable Reconciliation (Instructor to Demonstrate)

1. Enable reconciliation for suspense account 2990 for your accounting flexfield.

• (N) Setup> Financials> Flexfields> Key> Values

• Select the Value Set radio button

• Name field = Operations Accounting Flex

• Value = 2990

• (B) Find

• (T) Values, Hierarchy, Qualifiers

• Click into the Qualifier column

• Reconcile = Yes

• (B) OK

• Save

• Close the Segment Values window

• (B) OK

2. Navigate to Accounting Setup Manager and enable reconciliation for XXLedger.

• (N) Setup > Financials > Accounting Setup Manger > Accounting Setups

• Search By = Ledger

• Vision Operations (USA), (B) Go

• (I) Update Accounting Options

• (I) Update for Set Up Step Vision Operations (USA)

• (B) Next

• (B) Next

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



• Enable the Journal Reconciliation by checking the box.

• (B) Finish

• (L) Close Window

3. Generate the Program-Inherit Segment Values Attributes.

Enter Reconciliation Reference (Students will start the practice at this point)

4. You received a cash payment of $10,000, but you are unsure of the reason for the cash payment. For the time being, you post the balance to suspense account and enter a reconciliation reference to ensure that the balance will be cleared from the suspense account appropriately. Enter journals to debit USD $10,000 to account 01-000-1110-21XX-000 and credit USD $10,000 to 01-000-2990-21XX-000 for the current period.

5. Enter a journal.

• (N) Journals > Enter > (B) New Journal − Journal Name = XXLine Reconciliation − Period = Current − Accept the defaults for the remaining fields

• Enter the following information on the Journal lines.


1 01-000-1110-21XX-000 10000

2 01-000-2990-21XX-000 10000 SUSP

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



6. (T) Other Information

• Enter XXSUSP in the Reconciliation Reference field.

• Save.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




8. (B) Post > (B) OK to acknowledge concurrent request ID note

9. Reverse the journal for the same period by switching debit and credit.

• Requery the journal XXLine Reconciliation.

• (B) Reverse

• Select the current period.

• (B) OK

• (B) OK to acknowledge concurrent request ID note

10. Query the Journal entry just created.

• Search on Reverses%XX%.

11. Verify the Reconciliation Reference in the remaining Journal Entry.


13. (T) Other Information

14. Post the reversing journal.

• (B) Post

• Click (B) OK to acknowledge concurrent request ID note.


Manually Reconcile the Journals

(N) Journals > Reconciliation > Reconcile

15. Search for the journal lines. − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Currency = USD − Period = Current − Date = Accept default − Reference = XXSUSP

16. Select the lines.

17. (B) Reconcile.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Advanced Security

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Create a Ledger Set

Overview

In this practice, you will create a ledger set that includes your primary ledger and reporting currency and two other ledgers of your choosing. Then you will run a Trial Balance report and close periods across multiple ledgers in a ledger set using a single submission.

Assumptions




Tasks

1. Create a Ledger Set.

• Enter the following ledger set: − Name = XXLedger Set − Short Name = XX Ledger Set − Chart of Accounts = Operations Accounting Flex − Calendar = Accounting (choose Month) − Default Ledger = Vision Operations (USA)

• Assign the following ledgers to your ledger set: − Vision Operations (USA) − IAS Reporting Vision Ops

2. View System-Generated Data Access Set.

• Query the data access set that was system-generated based on your ledger set name XXLedger Set.

3. Assign Data Access Set to Responsibility (Instructor will demonstrate this step).

• Switch your responsibility. − Responsibility = General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA) − Profile = GL: Data Access Set

• Click in Responsibility field. − Assign XXLedger Set.

• Switch your responsibility.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



− Responsibility = General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)

4. Submit Reports Using Ledger Set.

• Submit a single request. − Name = Trial Balance − Ledger Set: XXLedger Set − Ledger Currency: GBP − Currency Type: Total − Pagebreak Segment: Company (01-99) − Period: May-01 − Amount Type: PTD − (B) OK − (B) Submit − Note your Request ID − (B) Yes in Decision window

5. Close Periods for Multiple Ledgers in a Ledger Set (Instructor will demonstrate this step).

• Submit another request. − Name = Periods - Close Period − Ledger Set: XXLedger Set − Period Name: Dec-07 − (B) OK − (B) Submit − Note your Request ID − (B) No in Decision window

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Create a Ledger Set

Overview

In this practice, you will create a ledger set that includes your primary ledger and reporting currency and two other ledgers of your choosing. Then you will run a Trial Balance report and close periods across multiple ledgers in a ledger set using a single submission.

Assumptions



Tasks

Create a Ledger Set


2. Navigate to the Ledger Set window.

• (N) Setup > Financials > Ledger Set

3. Enter the following ledger set: − Name = XXLedger Set − Short Name = XX Ledger Set − Chart of Accounts = Operations Accounting Flex − Calendar = Accounting (choose Month) − Default Ledger = Vision Operations (USA)

4. Assign the following ledgers to your ledger set: − Vision Operations (USA) − IAS Reporting Vision Ops

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



5. (I) Save

6. Close the window and click OK to the Decision window.

View System-Generated Data Access Set


• (N) Setup > Financials > Data Access Set − Query the data access set that was system-generated based on your ledger set name

XXLedger Set.

Assign Data Access Set to Responsibility (Instructor will Demonstrate this step)


• (M) File > Switch Responsibility − Responsibility = System Administrator


• (N) Profile > System − Responsibility = General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA) − Profile = GL: Data Access Set

10. (B) Find

11. Click in Responsibility field. − Assign XXLedger Set.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



12. Save.


• (M) File > Switch Responsibility − Responsibility = General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)

Submit Reports Using Ledger Set (Students resume at this step)

14. Navigate to the Standard Request Submission screen.


15. Submit a single request. − Name = Trial Balance − Ledger Set: XXLedger Set (Instructor will tell which value to use) − Ledger Currency: GBP − Currency Type: Total − Pagebreak Segment: Company (01-99) − Period: May-01 − Amount Type: PTD − (B) OK − (B) Submit − Note your Request ID − (B) Yes in Decision window

Close Periods for Multiple Ledgers in a Ledger Set (Instructor will Demonstrate this step)

16. Submit another request. − Name = Periods - Close Period − Ledger Set: XXLedger Set − Period Name: Dec-07 − (B) OK − (B) Submit − Note your Request ID − (B) No in Decision window

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Create a Data Access Set

Overview

In this practice, you will create a data access set that restricts read and write access to certain management segment values. You want to prevent certain managers from viewing and updating balances for departments outside of their authority. Then you will enter a journal and run a Trial Balance report using the data access set with management segment access.

Assumptions




• Instructor may want to set up a unique responsibility to attach this Data Access set to instead General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA).

Tasks

1. Activate the Management Flexfield Qualifer for the Operations Accounting Flex accounting flexfield. ( Instructor will demonstrate this step).

2. Create a Data Access Set.

• Enter the following ledger set: − Name = XXRead Only Dept 420 and 430 − Short Name = XXRead Only Access − Chart of Accounts = Operations Accounting Flex − Calendar = Accounting (Choose Month) − Access Set Type = Management Segment Value − Default Ledger = Vision Operations (USA)

• Assign the following ledgers and privileges to your data access set: − Vision Operations (USA) − IAS Reporting Vision Ops

Ledger Value Privilege

Vision Operations (USA) 410 Read and Write

Vision Operations (USA) 420 Read Only


IAS Reporting Vision Ops 410 Read and Write

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




IAS Reporting Vision Ops 420 Read Only


3. Assign Data Access Set to Responsibility (Instructor to Demonstrate this step).

• Switch your responsibility.

• Responsibility = System Administrator

• (N) Profile > System − Responsibility = General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA) − Profile = GL: Data Access Set

• Click in Responsibility field − Assign XXRead Only Dept 420 and 430

• Switch your responsibility. − Responsibility = General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)

4. Create a new journal called XXAccess Test (Students will start the practice on this step).

Enter the following journal (similar to an earlier lab to illustrate the limitations currently in place):


10 01-410-5800-21XX-000 3000 Salary Expense (410)



40 01-000-2225-21XX-000 6000 Accrued Salaries

• Instructor will reset the Profile Option done in this lab.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Guided Demonstration- Create a Data Access Set

Overview

In this practice, you will create a data access set that restricts read and write access to certain management segment values. You want to prevent certain managers from viewing and updating balances for departments outside of their authority. Then you will enter a journal and run a Trial Balance report using the data access set with management segment access.

Assumptions




• Instructor may want to set up a unique responsibility to attach this Data Access set to instead General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA).

Tasks

Activate the Management Flexfield Qualifer (Instructor to Demonstrate this step)

1. Navigate to Key Flexfield Segment window.


2. Query the Operations Accounting Flex accounting flexfield.

3. Unfreeze the Freeze Flexfield Definition.

4. (B) Segments

• Select the line for Department.

• (B) Flexfield Qualifiers

• Check the box for Management Segment.

• Save.

• Return to the Key Flexfield window.

5. Check the box to Freeze Flexfield definition.

• Click OK to the warning message.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



6. Click (B) Compile, click the OK to all the messages.


Create a Data Access Set

8. Navigate to the Data Access Set window.

• (N) Setup > Financials > Data Access Set

9. Enter the following ledger set: − Name = XXRead Only Dept 420 and 430 − Short Name = XXRead Only Access − Chart of Accounts = Operations Accounting Flex − Calendar = Accounting (Choose Month) − Access Set Type = Management Segment Value − Default Ledger = Vision Operations (USA)

10. Assign the following ledgers and privileges to your data access set: − Vision Operations (USA) − IAS Reporting Vision Ops


Vision Operations (USA) 410 Read and Write



IAS Reporting Vision Ops 410 Read and Write



11. (I) Save.

12. Close the window and click (B) OK to the Note window.



• (M) File > Switch Responsibility − Responsibility = System Administrator


• (N) Profile > System − Responsibility = General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



− Profile = GL: Data Access Set

15. Click (B) Find.

16. Click in Responsibility field. − Assign XXRead Only Dept 420 and 430

17. Save.


• (M) File > Switch Responsibility − Responsibility = General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)

Enter Journal (Students will start the practice on this step)




20. Click (B) New Journal.

21. Enter the following journal (similar to an earlier lab to illustrate the limitations currently in place):

− XX Salary Accrual Test − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Adjustment − Period = Current Period − Currency = USD − Journal Lines should be entered:

Notice that you are unable to

enter department values 420 and 430 because you do not have write access. You can only view journals and balances for those departments.


24. Instructor: Reset the Profile Option done in the previous steps 13-17 in this lab.





40 01-000-2225-21XX-000 6000 Accrued Salaries O

racl

e U

nive

rsity

and

New

Hor

izon

s C

ompu

ter L

earn

ing

Cen

ters

- Ab

u D

habi

use

onl

y

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Guided Demonstration - Define Definition Access Sets and Secure Definitions



You want to prevent other users from modifying or using your FSG Report definition. You will however allow them to view it. Create a definition access set to give read-only access to the FSG report definition and assign it to the General Ledger, SSC France responsibility that is assigned to the SSCFR user and your current user.

Also, to have the full ability to assign definition access set controls, assign the Super User Definition Access Set to your current responsibility, <Your Initials> US GL Accountant BSV Access.

Assign Definition Access Set with View Only Access

1. From the responsibility XX GL Accountant BSV Access, open the Definition Access Set window.

(N) Setup > Financials > Definition Access Set > Define

2. Define a Definition Access Set called XX View Only Access.

Note: You are only defining a name for your definition access set. You are not securing definitions yet.

3. Save.

4. Navigate to the Definition Access Set Assignments form.

(N) Setup > Financials > Definition Access Set >Assign

5. Assign the Definition Access Set to the responsibility General Ledger, SSC France. Select the AutoAssign and the View check boxes for Automatic Privileges.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



6. Save.

Assign Super User Definition Access Set

7. To have the full ability to assign definition access set controls, assign Super User Definition Access Set to your current responsibility, XX GL Accountant BSV Access. Save. Close the window, to have the Compile Definition Access Set process submitted.

8. Wait for process to complete.

Secure Definitions

9. Log out and log in as SSCFR/welcome.

10. Choose the responsibility General Ledger, SSC France.

• Open the Report page (N) Reports > Define > Report and query the FSG report definition called "Balance Sheet SSC" and enable security and immediately click the Assign Access button and notice how the report was automatically assigned with the View privilege. (B) OK

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Note: Some may argue that this is a security breach, because the user could quickly change his privilege from View to Use and Modify. This is a technical limitation because the concurrent program has not been submitted yet. It gets submitted when you save your work. We provide function security on the Assign Access button so if you want to prevent users from changing their privileges, you can hide the button from those responsibilities.

11. Save your work, (B) OK, and wait for the Compile Definition Access Set program to complete.

12. Re-query the definition to see that you can only view it now. Also notice the Run Report button is disabled because you cannot use or submit this definition.

13. Log out and log back in as your username/password and select the responsibility General Ledger, SSC Worldwide.

14. Query the FSG Report Definition. Notice you have full use, view, and modify privileges even though the Super User Definition Access Set was not assigned to this responsibility (It was assigned to the XX GL Accountant BSV Access responsibility). This is because the security is enforced at the user level, not at the responsibility level.

Note: You have just secured the report definition, but you have not secured the column set and row set definition. Other users will not be able to modify the report definition, but they can modify the components (the row set, the column set, row order, etc.). You need to secure the individual FSG components if you want to prevent other users from modifying them.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Financial Budgeting

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Multi-Currency

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define Currencies (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will define currencies.

Assumptions



Tasks

1. Define Foreign Currencies.


Code Name Description Issuing Territory

XXCUR XXCurr Foreign Currency France

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Define Currencies (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will define currencies.

Assumptions



• Responsibility is General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA)

Tasks

Define Foreign Currencies

1. Navigate to the Currencies window.



Note: If the field isn’t list below leave it blank.

Code Name Description Issuing Territory

XXCUR XXCurr Foreign Currency France

3. Save.


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define Rate Types (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will define rate types using the Currency Rates Manager.

Assumptions



• Responsibility is General Ledger, Vision Operations (USA).

Tasks

1. Define Rate Types. − Rate Type = XXPrivate − Description = XXPrivate Rate Type − Pivot Currency = XXCUR − (B) Add Another Row − Contra Currency = USD − (B) Add Another Row − Contra Currency = GBP

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Define Rate Types (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will define rate types using the Currency Rates Manager.

Assumptions




Tasks

Define Rate Types

1. Navigate to the Conversion Rate Types window.

• (N) Setup > Currencies > Currency Rates Manager > Rate Types − (B) Create Rate Type − Rate Type = XXPrivate − Description = XXPrivate Rate Type − Pivot Currency = XXCUR − (B) Add Another Row − Contra Currency = USD − (B) Add Another Row − Contra Currency = GBP

2. (B) Apply

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



3. Remain in this screen for the next exercise.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define Daily Conversion Rates Using the Currency Rates Manager (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will define daily conversion rates using the Currency Rates Manager.

Assumptions




Tasks

1. Define Conversion Rates.


From To From Date To Date Type Conv. rate

XXCUR USD First day of current period

Last day of current period

XXPrivate 1.45

• Add Another Row.

• Enter the Following:


XXCUR GBP First day of current period


XXPrivate 2.0

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Define Daily Conversion Rates Using the Currency Rates Manager (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will define daily conversion rates using the Currency Rates Manager.

Assumptions




Tasks

Define Conversion Rates

1. Select the Rates tab.

2. (B) Create Daily Rates



XXCUR USD First day of current period


XXPrivate 1.45

4. (B) Add Another Row

5. Enter the Following:


XXCUR GBP First day of current period


XXPrivate 2.0

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



6. (B) Apply

Verify the Process completes successfully.

7. (B) Return to Daily Rates Search

8. Query the rates for your XXCUR with USD and your Rate Type.

9. (B) Go

10. Note rates were created.

11. Query again for USD to GBP. Review the Cross Rates created.

12. Close window and return to the Navigator.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Enter a Foreign Currency Journal (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will enter and post a journal denominated in a foreign currency.

Assumptions




Tasks

1. Enter a Foreign Currency Journal.

• New Journal − Journal = XXFC Journal − Description = Foreign currency journal − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Accrual − Period = Current period − Currency = XXCUR − Date = Last day of current period − Type = XXPrivate



10 01-410-7640-21XX-000 20000 Airfare

20 01-420-7640-21XX-000 30000 Airfare

30 01-000-2210-21XX-000 50000 Payable

• Post your journal. O

racl

e U

nive

rsity

and

New

Hor

izon

s C

ompu

ter L

earn

ing

Cen

ters

- Ab

u D

habi

use

onl

y

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



2. Perform an Account Inquiry.


Low High

Company 01 01

Department 410 410

Account 7640 7640

Sub-Account 21XX 21XX

Product 000 000

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Enter a Foreign Currency Journal (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will enter and post a journal denominated in a foreign currency.

Assumptions



• Responsibility = XXGeneral Ledger Super User, XXLEDGER

Tasks

Enter a Foreign Currency Journal



2. (B) New Journal − Journal = XXFC Journal − Description = Foreign currency journal − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Category = Accrual − Period = Current period − Currency = XXCUR − Date = Last day of current period − Type = XXPrivate

3. Enter the following: Line Account Debit Credit Description

10 01-410-7640-21XX-000 20000 Airfare

20 01-420-7640-21XX-000 30000 Airfare

30 01-000-2210-21XX-000 50000 Payable

4. (I) Save Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



5. Note the converted currency figures.

6. Post your journal (B) Post > (B) OK to acknowledge concurrent request ID note.

7. Monitor the Post Journals request until it completes successfully. − Optionally, requery your journal name by prefixing “%” before and after the name,

such as %XXFC Journal%, to view the foreign currency journal that was converted to your reporting currency.


Perform an Account Inquiry


• (N) Inquiry > Account

• Ledger = Vision Operations (USA)

• Periods = Current Period

• Currency: − Type = Entered − Currency = XXCUR


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




Low High

Company 01 01

Department 410 410

Account 7640 7640

Sub-Account 21XX 21XX

Product 000 000

12. (B) Show Balances

13. Review journal details.

14. Close windows until you are back at the Navigator. O

racl

e U

nive

rsity

and

New

Hor

izon

s C

ompu

ter L

earn

ing

Cen

ters

- Ab

u D

habi

use

onl

y

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Enter a Journal with Conversion Rounding Differences (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will enter a journal with conversion rounding differences.

Assumptions



• Responsibility is Vision Operations (USA).

Tasks

1. Enter a Journal with Conversion Rounding Differences.

• (B) New Journal − Journal = XXRounding − Description = Journal with rounding differences − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Period = Current period − Category = Adjustment − Currency = XXCUR − Conversion Type = User − Conversion Rate = 1.45



10 01-000-1560-21XX-000 17200.34

20 01-000-1110-21XX-000 9543.59

30 01-000-2110-21XX-000 7656.75

• Post your journal.

2. Query your journal and note additional lines were added to balance the converted journal.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Enter a Journal with Conversion Rounding Differences (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will enter a journal with conversion rounding differences.

Assumptions




Tasks

Enter a Journal with Conversion Rounding Differences



2. (B) New Journal − Journal = XXRounding − Description = Journal with rounding differences − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Period = Current period − Category = Adjustment − Currency = XXCUR − Conversion Type = User − Conversion Rate = 1.45



10 01-000-1560-21XX-000 17200.34

20 01-000-1110-21XX-000 9543.59

30 01-000-2110-21XX-000 7656.75 Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



4. Save.

5. (B) Yes

6. Note the conversion created an unbalanced, converted journal.

7. Post your journal (B) Post.

8. Monitor the Post Journals request until it completes.

9. Query your journal and note additional lines were added to balance the converted journal.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Revalue Foreign Currency Balances Using Period End Rates (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will revalue foreign currency balances using period end rates. You can revalue a single account or ranges of accounts, for both income statement and balance sheet reporting. Income statement accounts are revalued on the basis of their PTD or YTD balances, in accordance with the Income Statement Accounts Revaluation Rule profile option. Balance sheet accounts are always revalued on the basis of their year– to– date balances.

Goal: Revalue FC balances based on a period end rate. Assume therate has changed from 1.45 to .5.

Entered Converted

10,000 X 1.45 14,500

10,000 X .5 5,000

UnrealizedG/LAccrual FC Accrual

9,500 9,500

Assumptions



Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Tasks

Define a Period-End Rate Type

1. Navigate to the Rate Types window

• (N) Setup > Currencies > Rates > Type − Add a new Rate type called XX Period End

2. Save

3. Close the Rates Type window

Assign the New Rate Type to Your Ledger

4. Navigate to the Accounting Setups window

• (N) Setup>Financials>Accounting Manager >Accounting Setups

5. Search for your Ledger

6. Select the (I) Update under ‘Update Accounting Options’ for your Primary Ledger

7. Select the (I) Update icon next to the first setup step for your Ledger

8. (B) Next

9. Default Period End Rate Type = XX Period End

11. (B) Finish

12. (H) Close Window

Define a Period End Rate

13. Navigate to the Daily Rates window

• (N) Setup>Currencies>Rates>Daily

14. Enter a rate for Today for your Period End Rate Type and your XXCUR − From: XXCUR − To: Your Ledger Currency − Date: Today − Rate Type: XX Period End − USD to XXCUR You Choose

15. Save

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Run Revaluation

16. Navigate to the Revalue Balances window

• (N) Currency > Revaluation − Revaluation = XXRevaluation − Currency Options, select single Currency = XXCUR − Rate Options, select Daily Rates − Type, select XX Period End − Unrealized Gain/Loss Account = 01-210-7830-0000-000

Note: When you enter a value for the Gain/Loss company segment it will gray out.

17. Enter the following in the Revaluation Ranges area:

Low High

Company 01 01

Department 000 ZZZ

Account 0000 2ZZZ

Subaccount 0000 ZZZZ

Product 000 000

18. (B) Revalue

19. Enter the parameters for the Program – Revalue Balances. − Revalaution = XXRevaluation − Period = current period − Effective Date = should default − Rate Date = should default

Note: If the GL Revaluation: AutoQuery Last Run Ranges profile option is set to Yes, the revaluation range you use will default into the form the next time you run revaluation.

20. (B) Submit

21. (B) OK

View Requests


23. Monitor your request until it completes

24. Review the output

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Review the Revaluation Journal

25. Navigate to the Enter Journals window

• (N) Journals > Enter − Source = Revaluation

26. (B) Find


28. (B) Post

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Consolidations

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Set Up and Perform Consolidation


(N) Consolidation > Workbench

1. Accept the default Vision Operations (USA) in the Parent Field in the Find Consolidation Processes window.

The Consolidation Workbench opens with the Parent, Vision Operations (USA), and its subsidiaries:

− Vision Project Mfg (102 (USD), − Vision Project Mfg (103 (USD), − Vision Project Mfg (ANY RPT), − Vision Project Mft (EUR).

Both the functional currency and statistical transactions displayed can be consolidated.


Mapping XX_Vision Serv to Operations USD

Description XXVision Services to Vision Operations

Target Operations Accounting Flex

Source Services Accounting Flex

3. Define segment rules by entering:

Target Action Source

Company Assign Single Value 01

Department Assign Single Value 422

Account Use Rollup Rules From Account***

Sub Account Assign Single Value 0000

Product Assign Single Value 000

4. In the Rollup Rules region, enter:

Target Segment Detail Value

Transfer Level Using Source Segment Parent Value

1110 Detail Detail Ranges



Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




Transfer Level Using Source Segment Parent Value



5. Enter Source Segment Ranges for 1110:

Low 1000

High 1ZZZ

6. Enter Source Segment Ranges 2110:

Low 2000

High 2ZZZ


Low 3000

High 3ZZZ


Low 4000

High 4ZZZ


Low 5000

High 8ZZZ

Define Consolidation

10. Enter the following information in the Consolidation Definition window: − Consolidation = XXServ to Vision Ops USD − Description = XXServices to Vision Operations USD − Parent = Vision Operations (USA) − Currency = USD − Subsidiary = Vision Services − Mapping = XX_Services to Operations USD select from the LOV − Method = Balances (Transactions is the other choice) − Usage = Standard

• Verify the Run Option check boxes are as follows: − Run Journal Import Checked

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



− Create Summary Journal Checked − Audit Mode Checked

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Set Up and Perform Consolidation


(N) Consolidation > Workbench

1. Accept the default Vision Operations (USA) in the Parent Field in the Find Consolidation Processes window.

2. Enter the current period in the Parent Period field.

3. Accept the default in the Balance Type field as Any.

4. Select (B) Find

The Consolidation Workbench opens with the Parent, Vision Operations (USA), and its subsidiaries:

− Vision Project Mfg (102 (USD), − Vision Project Mfg (103 (USD), − Vision Project Mfg (ANY RPT), − Vision Project Mft (EUR).

Both the functional currency and statistical transactions displayed can be consolidated.

5. If the State Controller is not visible, click (B) State Controller.

The State Controller buttons correspond to the functional steps of the consolidation process.

6. Select (B) Consolidation in the State Controller.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



7. Select the (B) Mapping in the Consolidation Definition window.

8. Select the (I) New to open a new record.


Mapping XX_Vision Serv to Operations USD

Description XXVision Services to Vision Operations

Target Operations Accounting Flex

Source Services Accounting Flex

10. Select (B) Segment Rules.

11. Define segment rules by entering:

Target Action Source

Company Assign Single Value 01

Department Assign Single Value 422

Account Use Rollup Rules From Account***

Sub Account Assign Single Value 0000

Product Assign Single Value 000

***After entering Account in the Source column the system automatically opens the Roll Up Rule Region.

12. In the Rollup Rules region, enter:

Note: You will be prompted to save after entering the Subsidiary Segment Ranges.


Transfer Level Using Source Segment

Parent Value

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




Transfer Level Using Source Segment

Parent Value







Low 1000

High 1ZZZ

14. Enter Source Segment Ranges 2110:

Low 2000

High 2ZZZ


Low 3000

High 3ZZZ


Low 4000

High 4ZZZ


Low 5000

High 8ZZZ

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



18. Save your work and close the Segment Rules window.

The (B) Account Rules allows a range of Source Accounts to be mapped to a specific Target Account. Multiple Account Rules can be created.

19. Close the Chart of Accounts Mapping.

Define Consolidation

Enter the following information in the Consolidation Definition window: − Place cursor in the Consolidation header field, click (I) New − Consolidation = XXServ to Vision Ops USD − Description = XXServices to Vision Operations USD − Parent = Vision Operations (USA) − Currency = USD − Subsidiary = Vision Services − Mapping = XX_Services to Operations USD select from the LOV − Method = Balances (Transactions is the other choice) − Usage = Standard

• Verify the Run Option check boxes are as follows: − Run Journal Import Checked

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



− Create Summary Journal Checked − Audit Mode Checked

21. Save.

22. Close window.

23. Refresh the current screen (CTRL+F11).

• Place cursor in the field that has XXVision Serv to Vision Ops with the Transferred Balances column showing Current.

• Select (B) Transfer in State Controller region.

24. Accept the default and enter the following periods (Instructor may assign a different calendar period):

− Subsidiary Period = Mar-07 − Parent Standard Period = Mar-07

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



25. Select (B) Transfer in the Transfer Consolidation Data window.

• Record the Concurrent ID

26. (B) OK

27. Close the window.


29. Verify the process Completes Normal.

30. View the output for the Journal Import concurrent process.

31. Return to the Consolidation Workbench.

• Verify the status shows Imported.

• Click (B) Review Journal in the State Controller.

• Review the Accounts created close the Journal window.

• Optionally, Post the Journal.

32. Return to the Navigator. Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Period Close

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Guided Demonstration - Close Period

1. Close Periods for Multiple Ledgers in a Ledger Set

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Guided Demonstration - Close Period


1. Close Periods for Multiple Ledgers in a Ledger Set.

2. (N) Reports > Request > Standard

3. Submit a Single Request. − Name = Periods - Close Period − Ledger Set: XXLedger Set − Period Name: Current period

− (B) OK − (B) Submit − Note your Request ID − (B) No in Decision window

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Financial Reporting

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define a Row Set (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will define a row set.

Scenario: A memo from your controller requests a five-month overhead summary report showing actual balances rounded to thousands for departments 310, 350, and 375 combined. In the first step, you will create a row set identifying the Account Assignments (ranges) for the report and a Calculation (total).

Assumptions



• Responsibility General Ledger Vision Operations (USA)

• If you use the responsibility below be aware there is no activity against these accounts and the reports will generate no data or output. To use the below responsibilities the students will need to create and post journal entries to the accounts using information from Oct-05.

Tasks

1. Create a Row Set. − Name = XXRow Set − Description = Overhead Summary

• Assign the following accounts, save and proceed after entering each line:

Line Line Item Indent Lines to

Skip After

Account Range Low

Account Range High

Display

10 OVERHEAD 1

20 Salaries 3 --5800-- --5800-- T

30 Operating Expenses 3 --7000-- --7639-- T

40 Airfare 3 --7640-- --7640-- T

50 Meals 3 --7690-- --7690-- T

60 Other Expenses 3 --7691-- --8999-- T

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



• Assign the following for the TOTAL row.

Line Line Item

100 TOTAL

• Specify the following formatting: − Indent = 0

• Specify the following underline characters − Before: = − After: =

• Calculation

Seq Operator Low High

10 + 11 99

2. Run an Ad Hoc Report.

• Define Ad Hoc Report − Title = Overhead Summary − Row Set = XXRow Set − Column Set = PTD,QTD,YTD Actual

• (B) OK − Period = Oct-05

3. Run the Row Set Detail Listing Report. − Request Name = FSG - Row Set Detail Listing − Row Set Name = XXRow Set

4. Run the Row Set Summary Listing Report. − Request Name = FSG - Row Set Summary Listing

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Define a Row Set (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will define a row set.

Scenario: A memo from your controller requests a five-month overhead summary report showing actual balances rounded to thousands for departments 310, 350, and 375 combined. In the first step, you will create a row set identifying the Account Assignments (ranges) for the report and a Calculation (total).

Assumptions



• Responsibility General Ledger Vision Operations (USA)

• If you use the responsibility below be aware there is no activity against these accounts and the reports will generate no data or output. To use the below responsibilities the students will need to create and post journal entries to the accounts using information from May-07.

Tasks

Create a Row Set

1. Navigate to the row set definition window.

• (N) Reports > Define > Row Set − Name = XXRow Set − Description = Overhead Summary

2. (B) Define Rows

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



3. Assign the following accounts, save and proceed after entering each line:

Line Line Item Indent Lines to

Skip After

Account Range Low

Account Range High

Display

10 OVERHEAD 1

20 Salaries 3 --5800-- --5800-- T

30 Operating Expenses 3 --7000-- --7639-- T

40 Airfare 3 --7640-- --7640-- T

50 Meals 3 --7690-- --7690-- T

60 Other Expenses 3 --7691-- --8999-- T

4. Assign the following for the TOTAL row.

Line Line Item

100 TOTAL

5. Specify the following formatting: − Indent = 0

6. Specify the following underline characters. − Before: - (Hyphen is to represent a single line) − After: = (Equal sign is to represent a double line for the Total)

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



7. (B) Calculation


10 + 11 99

8. Save.

9. Close all windows to return to the Navigator.

Run an Ad Hoc Report

10. Navigate to the request submission window.

• (N) Reports > Request > Financial

• Select Individual Reports.

11. (B) Define Ad Hoc Report − Title = Overhead Summary − Row Set = XXRow Set − Column Set = PTD,QTD,YTD Actual

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



12. (B) OK − Period = Oct-05

13. (B) Submit

14. (M) View > Requests to view output online.

Run the Row Set Detail Listing Report


• (N) Reports > Request > Standard − Request Name = FSG - Row Set Detail Listing − Row Set Name = XXRow Set

16. (B) OK

17. (B) Submit Request


Run the Row Set Summary Listing Report


• (N) Reports > Request > Standard − Request Name = FSG - Row Set Summary Listing

20. (B) Submit Single Request


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



22. Return to the Navigator.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define a Column Set (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will define a column set.

Assumptions




Tasks

1. Create a Column set. − Name = XXColumn Set − Description = 5 Month Rolling Summary

• Build Column Set.


Sequence 10 20 30 40 50 60

Name POI-4 POI-3 POI-2 POI-1 POI TOTAL

Amount Type

PTD-Actual

PTD-Actual

PTD-Actual

PTD-Actual

PTD-Actual

Offset -4 -3 -2 -1 0

Format Mask

9,999,999 9,999,999 9,999,999 9,999,999 9,999,999 9,999,999,999

2. Create the heading. − Column 60: Replace &POI0 with TOTAL

• Define Columns.

Note: Position is the number of characters from the left margin where the column will appear. Sequence is used for calculations and has no impact on positioning of the column.



Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



10 + 10 59

• Exceptions − Flag = * − Description = Greater Than $25,000 − Condition = Greater Than − Constant = 25000

3. Run an Ad Hoc Report.

• Define Ad Hoc Report − Title = 5 Month Rolling Overhead Summary − Row Set = XXRow Set − Column Set = XXColumn Set

• (B) OK − Period = Oct-05

4. Run the Column Set Detail Listing Report. − Request Name = FSG - Column Set Detail Listing − Column Set Name = XXColumn Set

5. Run the Column Set Summary Listing Report. − Request Name = FSG - Column Set Summary Listing

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Define a Column Set (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will define a column set.

Assumptions




Tasks

Create a Column set

1. Navigate to the Column Set definition window.

• (N) Reports > Define > Column Set − Name = XXColumn Set − Description = 5 Month Rolling Summary

2. (B) Build Column Set.


Note: To add a column, click (I) Add Column.

Sequence 10 20 30 40 50 60

Name POI-4 POI-3 POI-2 POI-1 POI TOTAL

Amount Type

PTD-Actual

PTD-Actual

PTD-Actual

PTD-Actual

PTD-Actual

Offset -4 -3 -2 -1 0

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Format Mask

9,999,999 9,999,999 9,999,999 9,999,999 9,999,999 9,999,999,999

4. Save.

Create the heading

5. (B) Create Default Heading − Column 60: Replace &POI0 with TOTAL

6. (B) OK to close the window.

7. (B) Define Columns.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Note: Position is the number of characters from the left margin where the column will appear. Sequence is used for calculations and has no impact on positioning of the column.

8. Scroll down to the TOTAL column (Sequence 60).

9. In the Total column select (B) Calculations.



10 + 10 59

11. Close the Calculations window.

12. (B) Exceptions − Flag = * − Description = Greater Than $25,000 − Condition = Greater Than − Constant = 25000

13. Save.

Run an Ad Hoc Report


• (N) Reports > Request > Financial

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



• Select Individual Reports.

15. (B) Define Ad Hoc Report − Title = 5 Month Rolling Overhead Summary − Row Set = XXRow Set − Column Set = XXColumn Set

16. (B) OK − Period = Oct-05

17. (B) Submit

18. View the output online.

Run the Column Set Detail Listing Report


• (N) Reports > Request > Standard − Request Name = FSG - Column Set Detail Listing − Column Set Name = XXColumn Set

20. (B) Ok

21. (B) Submit

22. View your request online.

Run the Column Set Summary Listing Report


• (N) Reports > Request > Standard> Single Request − Request Name = FSG - Column Set Summary Listing

24. (B) Submit

25. View your request online.

26. Return to the Navigator. O

racl

e U

nive

rsity

and

New

Hor

izon

s C

ompu

ter L

earn

ing

Cen

ters

- Ab

u D

habi

use

onl

y

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define a Report (Required)

Oracle General Ledger

Job Title*

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define a Report (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will combine a row set and a column set to define a report.

Assumptions




Tasks

1. Define the report. − Name = XX5 Month Rolling Overhead − Title = 5 Month Rolling Overhead − Row Set = XXRow Set − Column Set = XXColumn Set

2. Submit the report. − Report = XX5 Month Rolling Overhead − Period = Oct-05

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Define a Report (Required)

Repeat task title

Overview

In this practice, you will combine a row set and a column set to define a report.

Assumptions




Tasks

Define the report

1. Navigate to the Report definition window.

• (N) Reports > Define > Report − Name = XX5 Month Rolling Overhead − Title = 5 Month Rolling Overhead − Row Set = XXRow Set − Column Set = XXColumn Set

2. Save.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Submit the report


• (N) Reports > Request > Financial > Individual − Report = XX5 Month Rolling Overhead − Period = Oct-05

4. (B) Submit


6. Return to the Navigator.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define a Content Set (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will create a content set.

Scenario: A memo from the controller requests separate Overhead Summary reports for each of the Sales departments. To do this, you must create a Content Set for your existing XX5 Month Rolling Overhead report.

Assumptions



Tasks


1. Define the content set. − Name = XXPE Content Set − Description = PE on Dept − Type = Sequential − Seq = 10 − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA)

− Short Name in the LOV, automatically created by the system)

Segment Low High Display

Company

Department 410 430 PE

Account

Sub-Account

Product

2. Run your XX5 Month Rolling Overhead Report adding your XXPE Content Set. − Report = XX5 Month Rolling Overhead − Period = Oct-05 − Content Set = XXPE Content Set

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Define a Content Set (Required)

Overview

In this practice, you will create a content set.

Scenario: A memo from the controller requests separate Overhead Summary reports for each of the Sales departments. To do this, you must create a Content Set for your existing XX5 Month Rolling Overhead report.

Assumptions



Tasks


Define the content set

1. Navigate to the Content Set definition form.

• (N) Reports > Define > Content Set − Name = XXPE Content Set − Description = PE on Dept − Type = Sequential − Seq = 10 − Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) − Short Name in the LOV, automatically created by the system)

Segment Low High Display

Company

Department 410 430 PE

Account

Sub-Account

Product

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



2. (B) OK

3. Save.

4. Close the Content Set window.

Run your XX5 Month Rolling Overhead Report adding your XXPE Content Set

5. Navigate to the request submission form.

• (N) Reports > Request > Financial − Report = XX5 Month Rolling Overhead − Period = Oct-05 − (T) Optional Components, Content Set = XXPE Content Set

6. (B) Submit

7. Record the concurrent request number _________________.


• (M) View > Requests > (B) Find

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



9. (B) Next to view each Department’s page.

Note: If the periods in your accounting calendar contain varying number of days, such as a monthly calendar that contains 28 days in one period and 31 in another, you can still schedule financial schedules to run on the last day of every period. To do this, enter a number greater than the maximum number of days in any month, such as 32, in the Run Day field of the Concurrent Request Schedules window. Doing so automatically tells the system to run the schedule on the last day of every period. The Scheduler/PreReleaser concurrent manager must be running to use advanced scheduling.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define a Row Order (Required)

Oracle General Ledger

Job Title*

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Define a Row Order (Required)

Overview

The controller requests that you create a Row Order to display both the Value and Description of the Department segment to be used with your XXRB Content Set. In this practice, you will create a row order.

Note: When you use Content Sets an abbreviated listing of your Accounting Flexfield appears in the left side of the report. We will use the row order to eliminate some of the listing.

Assumptions



Tasks


1. Define a Row Order. − Name = XXRow Order


Seq Segment Order By Display Width

1 Ledger Ledger Name

Ledger Name 15

2 Company Value Value and Desc. 0

3 Department Value Value and Desc. 15

4 Account Value Value and Desc. 0

5 Sub-Account Value Value and Desc. 0

6 Product Value Value and Desc. 0

2. Copy your XXPE Content Set to create XXRE Content Set.

3. Run a Report adding your XXRE Content Set and XXRow Order. − Report = Overhead Summary − Row Set = XX Row Set − Column Set = PTD, QTD, YTD Actual

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



(T) Required Parameters − Ledger will Default − Period = Current Period − Currency will Default

(T) Optional Components − Content Set = XXPE Content Set − Row Order = XXRow Order

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution - Define a Row Order (Required)

Overview

The controller requests that you create a Row Order to display both the Value and Description of the Department segment to be used with your XXRB Content Set. In this practice, you will create a row order.

Note: When you use Content Sets an abbreviated listing of your Accounting Flexfield appears in the left side of the report. We will use the row order to eliminate some of the listing.

Assumptions



Tasks


Define a Row Order

1. Navigate to the Row Order definition form.

• (N) Reports > Define > Order − Name = XXRow Order


Seq Segment Order By Display Width

1 Ledger Ledger Name Ledger Name 15

2 Company Value Value and Description 0

3 Department Value Value and Description 15

4 Account Value Value and Description 0

5 Sub-Account Value Value and Description 0

6 Product Value Value and Desc. 0

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



3. Save.


Copy your XXPE Content Set to Create XXRE Content Set

5. Navigate to the AutoCopy form.

• (N) Reports > AutoCopy − Component = Content Set − Source = XXPE Content Set − Target = XXRE Content Set − (B) Copy − (B) Ok − Close all windows and return to the Navigator

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



6. Navigate to the Content Set definition form.

• (N) Reports > Define > Content Set

7. Locate XXRE Content Set.

8. Change the display for Department to RE.

• Click in the Low column.

• Change the display to RE.

• Save.


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Run a Report adding your XXRE Content Set and XXRow Order

9. Navigate to the request submission form.

• (N) Reports > Request > Financial − Select Option for Individual Report − (B) OK − (B) Define Ad Hoc Report − Report = Overhead Summary − Row Set = XX Row Set − Column Set = PTD, QTD, YTD Actual

• (B) OK

10. (T) Required Parameters − Ledger will Default − Period = Oct-05 − Currency will Default

11. (T) Optional Components − Content Set = XXRE Content Set − Row Order = XXRow Order

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



• The check box on the left needs to be checked.

12. (B) Submit

• Record the concurrent request number __________________.


• (M) View > Requests > (B) Find


Note: You may see duplicate results on the "View Output" if the Instructor demonstrated the creation of Ledger Sets.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Guided Demonstration - FSG Reporting Using Ledger Sets



Instructions: Submit a Balance Sheet that contains data for ledgers in a ledger set. The columns in the report contain data for each ledger. The last column aggregates data across ledgers in a ledger set.

Here is the report definition for the Balance Sheet:

1. Open the Submit Requests form.

(N) Reports > Request > Standard

2. Submit the request called Program - Publish FSG Report.

3. In the parameters, enter the following:

• Ledger: SSC US (defaults)

• Report: Balance Sheet SSC WW PTD

• Period: 12-06

• Currency: USD

Accept the remaining defaults.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



4. Click on (B) Options.

Note the XML Publisher Template associated with this report.

5. Submit your request and then view the output. Your report should look something like what is shown below.

The first column retrieves balances from SSC US. The second and third columns retrieve balances from SSC France's USD Reporting Currency and SSC Italy's Journal level Reporting Currency, respectively. All three of these ledgers used the currency USD.

The last column aggregates data from all USD ledgers in the ledger set.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Oracle Advanced Global Intercompany System

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Guided Demonstration - Setting up Advanced Global Intercompany System


Responsibility: Intercompany Super User, SSC Worldwide

This demonstration will show you how to setup Advanced Global Intercompany System. You will set up the intercompany accounts, create and assign organizations, create transaction types, define the invoicing options and update system options.

Scenario

SSC US, a US-based company, currently has operations in both the US and Italy. Here is a graphical representation of how the legal entities and ledgers are currently defined for both the parent company and Italian subsidiary:

SSC US has just acquired a Company in France called <Your initials> SSC France, a non-profit organization. The following depicts how the parent company would like their French subsidiary set up:

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



We now need to set up an intercompany and intracompany accounts for SSC France and also create a trading relationship between SSC US and SSC France.

Note: Only the required attributes are listed for this guided demonstration.

Create the Intercompany Accounts

(N) Setup > Accounting > Intercompany Accounts.

1. Search for the following: Transacting Legal Entity SSC France

Transacting Ledger SSC France

2. Click (B) Go.

3. Review the following: Transacting Balancing Segment Value

101 101

Transacting Ledger SSC US 01 SSC US 01

Trading Partner Balancing Segment Value

001 003

4. Click (I) View for the Balancing Segment Value 001.

5. (B) Update

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



6. Change the Intercompany Receivables Account to the following: Company 101 (SSC France)

Division 100 (Division 100)

Account 18100 (I/C Receivable)

SubAccount 0000 (None)

Department 410 (Sales International)

Product 120 (Product 120)

I/C 001 (SSC US LE 1 OU 1)

7. Use the Search button and the Create button.

8. Change the Intercompany Payables Account to the following: Company 101 (SSC France)


Account 29100 (I/C Payable)





9. Use the Search button and the Create button.

10. Click (B) Apply.

Create Balancing Rules

(N) Setup > Accounting > Intracompany Balancing Rules (B) Create Rule.

11. Query the following. Ledger SSC France

12. Click (B) Go.

13. Click (B) Create Rule.

14. Enter the following: Ledger SSC France

Source Intercompany

Category Intercompany

Debit Balancing Segment Value All Other

Credit Balancing Segment Value All Other

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



15. Query/Enter the following for Debit Account: Company 101 (SSC France)


Account 18100 (I/C Receivable)




I/C 101 (SSC France)

16. Query/Enter the following for Credit Account: Company 101 (SSC France)


Account 29100 (I/C Payable)





17. Click (ST) Options.

18. Enter the following: Default Options Manually Entered Clearing Balancing

Segment Value

Note: Leave the remaining options selected as is.


Create Organizations

(N) Setup > Organizations.

10. Click (B) Create Organization and enter the following: Organization Name XX SSC France Organization

Legal Entity Name SSC France


Create Organization Assignments

(N) Setup > Security.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



21. Query for the following. Select your userid. Person Name Pat Stock

22. Click (B) Create Assignments and enter the following: Intercompany Organization Name

XX SSC France Organization

23. Select Allow Access to Transactions to allow the user access to transactions.


Invoicing Options – Receivables Assignments

(N) Setup > Invoicing Options > Receivables Assignments.

25. Query the following: Operating Unit SSC France

26. Click (B) Add Assignments.

27. Select values for the following: Transaction Type Name I/C Transfer

Receivables Transaction Type Intercompany

Receivables Memo Line Intercompany Freight


Invoicing Options – Customer and Supplier Associations

In this section, we will create a customer association with SSC Italy and a supplier association with SSC US.

Create Customer Association

(N) Setup > Invoicing Options > Customer and Supplier Associations.

29. Click (T) Customer and Supplier Association.

30. Click (B) Create Customer Association.

31. Enter the following: Legal Entity SSC France

Operating Unit SSC France

Organization Name XX SSC France Organization

32. Select SSC Italy from the View and Select Trading Organizations.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



33. Click (B) Continue.

34. Select the following: Select Existing Customer Account

Select the radio button.

Customer Name SSC

Bill To Site 12600

35. Click (B) Finish.

Create Supplier Association

1. Click (T) Customer and Supplier Association.

Click (B) Create Supplier Association.

Enter the following: Legal Entity SSC France

Operating Unit SSC France

Organization Name <Your Initials> SSC France Organization

36. Select SSC US 01 from the View and Select Trading Organizations.

37. Click (B) Continue.

38. Select the following: Select Existing Supplier Account

Select the radio button.

Supplier Name SSC

Pay To Site SSC FR-US


Trading Partners

(N) Setup > Invoicing Options > Customer and Supplier Associations > (T) Trading Partners.

40. Enter the following: Initiator Organization SSC France

Recipient Organization SSC US 01

3. Click Go.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Create Transaction Types

(N) Setup > Transaction Types.

41. Click (B) Create Transaction Type.

42. Enter the following: Name <Your Initials> I/C Transaction

Code 12345

43. Select Required from Invoicing and Manual Approval to create invoices and manually approve the transactions.


Update System Options

(N) Setup > System Options.

45. Click (B) Update.

46. Make the necessary changes.


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Intercompany and Intracompany Balancing

Overview

In this practice, you will balance intercompany and intracompany transactions. This practice demonstrates how Advanced Global Intercompany System is used to process intercompany transactions between the legal entities of an enterprise. It also demonstrates how you can streamline and integrate intercompany transactions with subledgers where required.

Assumptions



Tasks



1. Enter an intracompany journal in General Ledger.

Enter an intracompany transaction between two legal entities belonging to the same ledger.

• Create new journal using the following details: Journal XX Intracompany (where XX is your initials)

Description Optional

Ledger SSC US

Period Any Open Period

• Create new lines using the following details: Line 1 10

Account 1 001.100.43000.0000.421.120.003

Credit 1 2000

Line 2 20

Account 2 003.300.60112.0000.421.120.001

Debit 2 2000

• Save and post the journal.

2. Enter intracompany and intercompany transactions in a single journal in subledger.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



• Switch to Receivables, SSC Worldwide responsibility:

• Inquire and create the journal.

• Enter the following in the Header: Balance type Actual

*GL Date (example 24-Mar-2008)

*Ledger SSC US

*Category Other

Description XX SLA JE (where XX is your initials)

• Enter the following lines: Account 1 001.100.43000.0000.421.120.003

Accounting Class 1 Intercompany

Credit 1 2000

Account 2 003.300.60112.0000.421.120.001


Debit 2 2000

Account 3 001.100.43000.0000.421.120.004


Credit 3 3000

Account 4 004.100.60112.0000.421.120.001

Debit 4 3000

• Post the journal.

3. View the intracompany and the intercompany lines are generated by the system.

4. View the journal in General Ledger.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution – Intercompany and Intracompany Balancing

Overview

In this practice, you will balance intercompany and intracompany transactions. This practice demonstrates how Advanced Global Intercompany System is used to process intercompany transactions between the legal entities of an enterprise. It also demonstrates how you can streamline and integrate intercompany transactions with subledgers where required.

Assumptions



Tasks



1. Enter an intracompany journal in General Ledger.

Enter an intracompany transaction between two legal entities belonging to the same ledger.


This starts core forms.

• (B) New Journal

• Enter the following: Journal XX Intracompany

Description XX Intracompany

Ledger SSC US

Period Current Period

• (T) Lines.

• Enter the following: Line 1 10

Account 1 001.100.43000.0000.421.120.003

Credit 1 2000

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Line 2 20

Account 2 003.300.60112.0000.421.120.001

Debit 2 2000

• (I) Save > (B) Post > (B) OK

• Close Journals form.

• (I) Find

• Query the following: Journal XX Intracompany

Period Today’s Date

• (B) Find

• (B) Requery (until batch status is 'Posted')

• (B) Review Journal

Note that the posting program creates Intracompany balancing lines automatically.

• Close Journals form.

2. Enter intracompany and intercompany transactions in a single journal in subledger.

• (M) File > Switch Responsibility: Responsibility Receivables, SSC Worldwide

• (N) Inquiry > Subledger Accounting > Journal Entries

• (B) Create Journal Entry

• Enter the following in the header: Balance type Actual

*GL Date Today’s Date

*Ledger SSC US

*Category Other

Description XX SLA JE

• Enter the following for the Lines: Account 1 001.100.43000.0000.421.120.003

Accounting Class 1 Intracompany

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Credit 1 2000

Account 2 003.300.60112.0000.421.120.001

Accounting Class 2 Intracompany

Debit 2 2000

Account 3 001.100.43000.0000.421.120.004


Credit 3 3000

Account 4 004.100.60112.0000.421.120.001


Debit 4 3000

• (B) Calculate Totals

• (B) Continue

• Select the following: Complete Final and Post

• (B) Finish

You will see the confirmation, You have successfully created the subledger journal entry as Final and submitted concurrent requests to transfer and post the entry to the General Ledger. Please view concurrent request ID XXXXX to determine whether the transfer was successful.

3. Search for the Subledger Journal Entry.

• Enter the following for Advanced Search: Ledger SSC US

From GL Date Today’s Date

To GL Date Today’s Date

• (B) Go

• Click on the Ledger (Hyperlink). Ledger SSC US

Description XX SLA JE (where XX is your initials)

The intracompany and the intercompany lines are generated by the system.

• Click on + sign for 'Show Additional Information

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



You will see that the Journal 'Transfer to GL Status" is "Yes, else, search for the subledger journal entry again).

• (H) Close Window (top right corner).

• Go to Core Applications Navigator.

4. View Journal in General Ledger.

• (M) File > Switch Responsibility: Responsibility General Ledger, SSC Worldwide


• In Find window (B) More and enter the following: Source Receivables

Category Other

Dates Created From Today’s Date

Dates Created To Today’s Date

• (B) Find

• (B) Review Journal

• Close Journals and Enter Journals window.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Practice - Create Manual Intercompany Transaction

Overview

In this practice, you will create an intercompany batch from one initiator to two recipients, transfer to subledgers using batch mode, compare the accounting representation in Payables for one recipient and run the Intercompany Reconciliation report.

Assumptions



Tasks



Note: Ensure that the accounting periods are open in General Ledger, Receivables and Payables.

1. Navigate to the Intercompany Transactions page.

2. Create a new intercompany batch.

• Enter the following: *Transaction Type I/C Sales

*Initiator SSC US 01

*Batch Date (Today’s Date)

*GL Date (Today’s Date)

*Currency USD

Distribution Mode (radio button)

Manual

Description Any description

This transaction type requires invoicing.

• Enter transactions as follows: Recipient (Trans #1) SSC France

Debit 2000

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Recipient (Trans #2) SSC Italy

Debit 3000

3. Create batch distributions for the initiator accounting.

• Enter the account: Company 001 (SSC US LE 1 OU 1)


Account 43000 (Revenue - I/C)





• Enter the amount: Credit 2000

• Enter the account: Company 001 (SSC US LE 1 OU 1)






I/C 102 (SSC Italy)

• Enter the amount: Credit 3000

4. Create the recipient accounting.

• Enter the account: Company 101 (SSC France)


Account 60112 (Personnel Lent / other Subsidiary)




Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




• Enter the amount: Debit 2000

• Select Transaction Number 2

• Enter the account: Company 102 (SSC Italy)







• Enter the amount: Debit 3000

5. Submit and query the batch. Batch Number Your batch number noted

• View the details for the transaction numbers.

• View the transactions in the Inbound transaction page.

• Search: Batch Number Your batch number noted

Transfer to Receivables and Process AR Invoice

6. Select the following program: Program Name Transfer Intercompany Transactions to Receivables

• Enter the following: GL Date From (Today’s Date)

GL Date To (Today’s Date)

Submit AR Auto Invoice Yes

• Submit the request.

• Refresh until the AutoInvoice Import program completed.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Note: The Transfer Intercompany Transactions to Receivables program starts the AutoInvoice Master program that submits the AutoInvoice Import program.

• Click the Output icon for: Name Autoinvoice Import Program

• Verify that the transaction is created

7. Check that the Intercompany batch has been assigned an invoice number. Batch Number Your Batch Number

• Make a note of the invoice number(s)

8. View Invoice in Receivables: Responsibility Receivables, SSC Worldwide

• Query the invoices and enter the following: Source Global%

Date (Today’s Date)

9. Create Accounting for the invoices.

• Select 'Create Final Accounting Post to GL'

A popup window lets you know that the accounting has been successfully created for the transaction.

Transfer to Payables and Process AP Invoice

10. Select the following program in the Intercompany Super User, SSC Worldwide responsibility.

• Select the following program: Program Name Transfer Intercompany Transactions to Payables



Submit Payables Import Yes

• Submit the request.

Note: The Payables Open Interface Import should be completed before you query the Invoice.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



11. Process the invoice in the Payables responsibility. Responsibility Payables, SSC Worldwide

• Query the invoices and enter the following: Trading Partner SSC

Invoice Date (Today’s Date)

• Process the invoice: Operation Unit SSC France

• Close the Invoice Workbench.

Report on Intercompany Transactions

13. Select the following program in the Intercompany Super User, SSC Worldwide responsibility. Responsibility Intercompany Super User, SSC Worldwide

14. Search the following request: Program Name Intercompany Reconciliation Data Extract Program

• Enter the following: *Transacting Ledger SSC US

*Transacting GL Period (Current Period)

• Submit the program.

• Run the reconciliation request.

• Enter the request number: *Request Id (request status must be complete to show up)

The request number noted

Template Intercompany Reconciliation Summary

Local Default

Format HTML

• Run the reconciliation request.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Solution – Create Manual Intercompany Transaction

Overview

In this practice, you will create an intercompany batch from one initiator to two recipients, transfer to subledgers using batch mode, and compare the accounting representation in Payables for one recipient.

Assumptions



Tasks



Note: Ensure that the accounting periods are open in General Ledger, Receivables and Payables.

1. Navigate to the Intercompany Transactions page.

• (N) Transaction > Outbound

2. Create a new intercompany batch.

• (B) Create

• Enter the batch information as follows: *Transaction Type I/C Sales

*Initiator SSC US 01

*Batch Date (Today’s Date)

*GL Date (Today’s Date)

*Currency USD

Distribution Mode (radio button)

Manual

Description Manual Intco Transaction

This transaction type requires invoicing.

• Enter Transactions as follows:

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Transaction Number Recipient Debit Credit

1 SSC France 2000

2 SSC Italy 3000

• (B) Continue

3. Create Batch Distributions for Initiator.

• (T) Initiator Accounting

• Select Transaction Number 1.

• (B) Add Line

Note: If transaction account definition is assigned to the ledger, you can accept derived distributions, or optionally override the derived distributions to correspond to values listed in the following table.

• Enter the Account (LOV) as follows: Company 001 (SSC US LE 1 OU 1)







• (B) Search

• If no result, click (B) Create.

• Select Code Combination > (B) Select.

• Enter the Amount as follows: Credit 2000


• (B) Add Line

• Enter the Account (LOV) as follows: Company 001 (SSC US LE 1 OU 1)


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED







I/C 102 (SSC Italy)

• (B) Search



• Enter the Amount as follows: Credit 3000

4. Create Recipient Accounting.

• (T) Recipient Accounting


• (B) Add Line

Note: If transaction account definition is assigned to the ledger, you may accept derived distributions, or optionally override the derived distributions to correspond to values listed in the following table.

• Enter the Account (LOV) as follows: Company 101 (SSC France)







• (B) Search


• Select Code Combination > (B) Select

• Enter the Amount as follows:

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



Debit 2000


• (B) Add Line

• Enter the Account (LOV) as follows: Company 102 (SSC Italy)







• (B) Search



• Enter the Amount as follows: Debit 3000

• (B) Submit

You will get confirmation that batch was submitted.

• Note the batch number.

5. View Created Batch.

• (T) Outbound

• Search: Batch Number Your batch number noted

• (B) Go

The batch status is Submitted as expected.

• Click the Batch Number.

The transaction type for this batch does not require approval and the transactions status are automatically set to 'Approved' by the system.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



• Click (I) View Details for any of the transaction numbers.

Note: It may take a while for the workflow process to complete and create the accounts. In the interim the status may show as Sent or Received. On completion, the batch is available in the Inbound tab.

By viewing details we can see that the intercompany receivables and intercompany payables account are added to both initiators and recipient. These lines are created using the intercompany accounts rules.

• (H) Return to View Batch page (in lower left corner of page).

• (B) View Distribution

Here we can view all the distributions for the batch.

• (H) Return to Batch (left down corner)

• (H) Return to Outbound Transactions

• (ST) Inbound

• Search: Batch Number Your batch number

• (B) Go

The transaction status is approved for both recipients.

Note: Make sure all transactions in the batch are approved before proceeding to the next step.

• (H) Click Home

You return to the Core Applications Navigator.

Transfer to Receivables and Process AR Invoice

6. Transfer to Receivables.

• (N) Request > Schedule

• Search for (magnify glass) and select as follows: Program Name Transfer Intercompany Transactions to Receivables

• (B) Next


Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



GL Date From (Today’s Date)


Submit AR Auto Invoice Yes

• (B) Next > (B) Next > (B) Next > (B) Next

• (B) Submit

You receive information about the request number.

• (B) OK

You are taken to the Request queue page.

• Click on the Request ID column title to sort in descending order (you may have to click several times).

• (B) Refresh (Click Refresh until AutoInvoice Import program completes)

Note: The Transfer Intercompany Transactions to Receivables program will start the AutoInvoice Master program that will submit the AutoInvoice Import program.

• Click the Output icon for : Name Autoinvoice Import Program

• Scroll down in report to verify that the transaction has been created.

• (H) Click Back to return to the Request window.


7. Check that an invoice number is assigned to the intercompany batch.

The Intercompany batch is assigned an invoice number when transferred to Receivables. The batch must have an invoice number(s) when transferring to Payables.

• (N) Transaction > Outbound

• Search the following: Batch Number Your Batch Number

• (B) Go

• Click (H) Batch Number.

• Click View Details for the two transactions.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



• In the Transaction Information section note the invoice number(s).

This is a unique invoice number for each recipient. You may take notes of both invoices by viewing details for the other invoice as well. The invoice number is the same in both Receivables and in Payables.

• (H) Click Home


8. View Invoice in Receivables.

• (M) File > Switch Responsibility: Responsibility Receivables, SSC Worldwide

• (N) Transactions > Transactions

• Query the invoices by key F11 and enter: Source Global%

Date (Today’s Date)

• Ctrl F11 to execute query.

• Click on the icon next to the invoice number .

The invoice appears in a new browser window.

• Close invoice browser window.

9. Create Accounting for both invoices.

• (M) Tools > Create Accounting

• Select Create Final Accounting Post to GL.

• (B) OK

A popup window will let you know that the accounting has been successfully created for the transaction.

• (B) OK (in note window)

• Down/Up - arrow to view the second invoice.

• Repeat above steps to 'Create Accounting' for the second invoice.

• Close Transactions window.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



You return to the Navigator.

Transfer to Payables and Process AP Invoice

10. Transfer to Payables.

• (M) File > Switch Responsibility.

• Select Responsibility: Responsibility Intercompany Super User, SSC worldwide


• Search for (magnify glass) and select the following: Program Name Transfer Intercompany Transactions to Payables

• (B) Next



Submit Payables Import Yes


• (B) Submit

You will receive information about the request number.

• (B) OK

Request window opens.

Note: The Payables Open Interface Import should be completed before you can query the Invoice in next step.

• (H) Click Home


11. Process Payables invoice.

• (M) File > Switch Responsibility: Responsibility Payables, SSC Worldwide

• (N) Invoices > Entry > Invoices

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED



• Enter the following: Trading Partner SSC

Invoice Date (Today’s Date)

Your query will result in the two invoices created from the Intercompany System. This is because my responsibility has been given access to both Operating Units, taking advantage of the new Multiple Organizations Access Control (MOAC) concept.

• (B) Click Find

• Close Invoice Workbench

Intercompany Reconciliation Report

The Advanced Global Intercompany System provides several standard reports to track intercompany transactions. We run the Intercompany Reconciliation report.

13. Switch Responsibility.

• (M) File > Switch Responsibility.

• Select Responsibility: Responsibility Intercompany Super User, SSC Worldwide

• (B) Ok

14. Submit Report.


• Search for (magnify glass) and select the following: Program Name Intercompany Reconciliation Data Extract Program

• (B) Next

• Enter the following: *Transacting Ledger SSC US

*Transacting GL Period (Current Period)


• (B) Submit

You will receive information about the request number. Please note the request number.

• (H) Click Home

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED




• (N) Request > Reconciliation

• Enter the request number: *Request Id (request status must be complete to show up)

The request number noted

Template Intercompany Reconciliation Summary

Local Default

Format HTML

• (B) Run

• Click (H) Period Net for any amount.

• Click any (H) Amount.

• Click (H) Show for any Journal Name.

Depending on the transaction source, you may drill further to view transaction details.

• Close Intercompany browser window.

Ora

cle

Uni

vers

ity a

nd N

ew H

oriz

ons

Com

pute

r Lea

rnin

g C

ente

rs -

Abu

Dha

bi u

se o

nly

THES

E eK

IT M

ATER

IALS

AR

E FO

R Y

OU

R U

SE IN

TH

IS C

LASS

RO

OM

ON

LY.

CO

PYIN

G e

KIT

MAT

ERIA

LS F

RO

M T

HIS

CO

MPU

TER

IS S

TRIC

TLY

PRO

HIB

ITED

Documents

R12 x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals ...dbmanagement.info/Books/MIX/D59687GC10_ag2_General_Ledger_GL.… · R12.x Oracle General Ledger Management Fundamentals - Student